Fujifilm X-H2 Owner's Manual

Add to My manuals
404 Pages

advertisement

Fujifilm X-H2 Owner's Manual | Manualzz
FF210003
Owner’s Manual
BL00005205-201 EN
Introduction
Thank you for your purchase of this product. Be sure that
you have read this manual and understood its contents before using the camera. Keep the manual where it will be
read by all who use the product.
For the Latest Information
The latest versions of the manuals are available from:
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/
The website can be accessed not only from
your computer but also from smartphones
and tablets. It also contains information on
the software license.
For information on firmware updates, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/firmware/cameras/
ii
P Chapter Index
Menu List
iv
1 Before You Begin
1
2 First Steps
37
3 Basic Photography and Playback
55
4 Movie Recording and Playback
63
5 Taking Photographs
71
6 The Shooting Menus
127
7 Playback and the Playback Menu
215
8 Network/USB Setting Menus
243
9 The Setup Menus
245
10 Shortcuts
287
11 Peripherals and Optional Accessories
309
12 Technical Notes
339
iii
Menu List
Camera menu options are listed below.
Menu List
Shooting Menus
Adjust settings when shooting photos or movies.
N See page 127 for details.
Photo Menus
N Items marked with both x and F icons are available in both the still
photography and movie shooting menus. Changes to these items in
either menu also apply to the item in the remaining menu.
H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
1⁄4
FILM SIMULATION
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT
WHITE BALANCE
DYNAMIC RANGE
2⁄4
D RANGE PRIORITY
TONE CURVE
COLOR
SHARPNESS
iv
P H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
P
128
HIGH ISO NR
129
CLARITY
130
LONG EXPOSURE NR
131
LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER
3⁄4
132
COLOR SPACE
134
PIXEL MAPPING
134
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
135
AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING
135
xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING
4⁄4
135
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING
136
140
140
141
141
141
142
142
142
143
143
143
144
144
144
145
Menu List
P A SHOOTING SETTING
148
FILTER SETTING
148
SPORTS FINDER MODE
148
PRE-SHOT sJ
149
SELF-TIMER
153 1⁄3 SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING
153
SELF-TIMER LAMP
153
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
154
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
EXPOSURE SMOOTHING
154
AE BKT SETTING
155
FILM SIMULATION BKT
157
FOCUS BKT SETTING
159
160 2⁄3 PHOTOMETRY
SHUTTER TYPE
160
FLICKER REDUCTION
161
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
161
IS MODE
161
ISO
162
163 3⁄3 DIGITAL TELE-CONV.
xF COOLING FAN SETTING
164
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
P
166
166
167
168
169
169
170
171
172
172
172
172
173
174
174
175
175
175
176
176
P
F FLASH SETTING
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
RED EYE REMOVAL
TTL-LOCK MODE
LED LIGHT SETTING
COMMANDER SETTING
CH SETTING
177
177
178
178
179
179
B MOVIE SETTING
MOVIE MODE
HIGH SPEED REC
MEDIA REC SETTING
F IS MODE
F IS MODE BOOST
AUDIO SETTING
180
180
180
180
180
181
P
v
Menu List
G AF/MF SETTING
FOCUS AREA
FOCUS MODE
AF MODE
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
1⁄3
STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION
AF POINT DISPLAYyz
NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS
PRE-AF
xF AF ILLUMINATOR
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
AF+MF
2⁄3
MF ASSIST
FOCUS CHECK
INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA
xF INSTANT AF SETTING
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY
3⁄3
xF AF RANGE LIMITER
TOUCH SCREEN MODE
Movie Menus
N Items marked with both x and F icons are available in both the still
photography and movie shooting menus. Changes to these items in
either menu also apply to the item in the remaining menu.
Menu List
P H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
P
B MOVIE SETTING
MOVIE SETTING LIST
184
199
F FILM SIMULATION
SHOOTING MODE
184
199
F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
MOVIE MODE
185
200
F WHITE BALANCE
HIGH SPEED REC
186
200
F DYNAMIC RANGE
1⁄3
MEDIA REC SETTING
187 1⁄2 F TONE CURVE
200
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING
191
200
F COLOR
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
192
201
F SHARPNESS
DIGITAL ZOOM
192
201
F HIGH ISO NR
F-Log/HLG RECORDING
193
INTERFRAME NR
201
DATA LEVEL SETTING
194 2⁄2 F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION 202
194
F PHOTOMETRY
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING 202
194
F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
2⁄3
195
F IS MODE
195
F IS MODE BOOST
196
F ISO
ZEBRA SETTING
196
ZEBRA LEVEL
196
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL 197
TALLY LIGHT
197
198
xF COOLING FAN SETTING
3⁄3 F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING 198
F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM
198
SETTING
198
xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 198
vi
Menu List
P P AUDIO SETTING
P
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
MIC JACK SETTING
MIC LEVEL LIMITER
WIND FILTER
LOW CUT FILTER
205
HEADPHONES VOLUME
205 XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING
Q TIME CODE SETTING
205
TIME CODE DISPLAY
206
START TIME SETTING
206
COUNT UP SETTING
206
DROP FRAME
206 HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT
206
207
208
209
209
210
210
210
210
210
211
203
203
204
204
205
P
212
212
213
213
214
vii
Menu List
G AF/MF SETTING
F FOCUS AREA
F FOCUS MODE
F AF MODE
F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING
1⁄2 xF AF ILLUMINATOR
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION
SETTING
F SUBJECT DETECTION
SETTING
F AF+MF
F MF ASSIST
F FOCUS CHECK
xF INSTANT AF SETTING
2⁄2 xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
xF AF RANGE LIMITER
F TOUCH SCREEN MODE
FOCUS CHECK LOCK
The Playback Menu
Adjust playback settings.
N See page 221 for details.
Menu List
C PLAY BACK MENU
SWITCH SLOT
RAW CONVERSION
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION
ERASE
1⁄3
SIMULTANEOUS DELETE
CROP
RESIZE
PROTECT
viii
P C PLAY BACK MENU
P
221
IMAGE ROTATE
230
222
VOICE MEMO SETTING
231
224
RATING
232
225
COPY
233
2⁄3
227
TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE 234
227
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 236
228
SLIDE SHOW
236
229
PHOTOBOOK ASSIST
237
PRINT ORDER (DPOF)
239
3⁄3 instax PRINTER PRINT
240
DISP ASPECT
241
Menu List
Setup Menus
Adjust basic camera settings.
N See page 245 for details.
P D SCREEN SETTING
P
VIEW MODE SETTING
256
246
EVF BRIGHTNESS
256
247
EVF COLOR
256
247
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT
257
248
1⁄4
LCD BRIGHTNESS
258
249
LCD COLOR
258
249
LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT
258
249
IMAGE DISP.
259
250
AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS
259
250
PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE 260
251
NATURAL LIVE VIEW
260
251
F-Log VIEW ASSIST
261
P 2⁄4
D SOUND SETTING
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING
261
AF BEEP VOL.
252
FRAMING GUIDELINE
262
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL.
252
AUTOROTATE PB
263
OPERATION VOL.
253
FOCUS SCALE UNITS
263
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER
253
APERTURE
UNIT
FOR
CINEMA
LENS
263
VOLUME
1⁄2
DUAL DISPLAY SETTING
264
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER
253
DISP.
CUSTOM
SETTING
264
SOUND
265
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME 254 3⁄4 LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF)
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD)
265
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND 254
LARGE
INDICATORS
DISP.
SETTING
266
PLAYBACK VOLUME
254
INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ.
266
2⁄2 4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK
255
LOCATION INFO
267
SUB MONITOR SETTING
267
SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND COLOR 268
4⁄4
269
x Q MENU BACKGROUND
269
F Q MENU BACKGROUND
ix
Menu List
D USER SETTING
FORMAT
b AREA SETTING
DATE/TIME
TIME DIFFERENCE
1⁄2
Qa
x MY MENU SETTING
F MY MENU SETTING
SENSOR CLEANING
BATTERY AGE
2⁄2 RESET
REGULATORY
Menu List
Menu List
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
FOCUS LEVER SETTING
x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
1⁄3 POWER ZOOM LENS FUNCTION
(Fn) SETTING
SELECTOR BUTTON SETTING
COMMAND DIAL SETTING
o S.S OPERATION
COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION
SHUTTER AF
SHUTTER AE
SHOOT WITHOUT LENS
2⁄3
SHOOT WITHOUT CARD
LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING
AE/AF-LOCK MODE
AWB-LOCK MODE
a ISO BUTTON SETTING
3⁄3 TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
LOCK
P D POWER MANAGEMENT
P
AUTO POWER OFF
PERFORMANCE
EVF/LCD BOOST SETTING
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.
281
281
282
282
271 D SAVE DATA SETTING
FRAME NO.
271
EDIT FILE NAME
272
x CARD SLOT SETTING
272
SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL)
272
SELECT FOLDER
273
COPYRIGHT INFO
273
DEFAULT CAPTION
273
GEOTAGGING
274
274
276
276
277
278
280
P
270
271
271
271
283
284
284
284
285
285
286
286
The Network/USB Settings Menu
Adjust camera network and USB settings. For more information,
visit:
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/x-h2_connection/
x
P Table of Contents
Introduction ..........................................................................................................ii
For the Latest Information .......................................................................................... ii
Menu List...............................................................................................................iv
Shooting Menus ..............................................................................................................iv
The Playback Menu......................................................................................................viii
Setup Menus ...................................................................................................................... ix
The Network/USB Settings Menu .......................................................................... x
Supplied Accessories ................................................................................... xxiii
About This Manual........................................................................................ xxiv
Symbols and Conventions ...................................................................................xxiv
Terminology ..................................................................................................................xxiv
1 Before You Begin
1
Parts of the Camera ............................................................................................2
The Serial Number Plate ..............................................................................................6
The Memory Card Slot Cover (Detachable).....................................................6
The Focus Stick (Focus Lever) ...................................................................................7
The Selector.........................................................................................................................7
The WB Button ...................................................................................................................7
The Mode Dial ....................................................................................................................8
The DRIVE Button .............................................................................................................9
The Command Dials.................................................................................................... 10
The Indicator Lamp...................................................................................................... 11
The LCD Monitor ........................................................................................................... 12
The Eye Cup...................................................................................................................... 13
Focusing the Viewfinder ........................................................................................... 13
Camera Displays ............................................................................................... 14
The Electronic Viewfinder ........................................................................................ 14
The LCD Monitor ........................................................................................................... 16
Choosing a Display Mode........................................................................................ 18
Adjusting Display Brightness ................................................................................. 20
Display Rotation ............................................................................................................. 20
The DISP/BACK Button............................................................................................... 21
The Dual Display ............................................................................................................ 22
xi
Customizing the Standard Display..................................................................... 23
Virtual Horizon ................................................................................................................ 25
The Secondary LCD Monitor .................................................................................. 26
Using the Menus .............................................................................................. 28
The Menus......................................................................................................................... 28
Selecting a Menu Tab ................................................................................................. 30
Touch Screen Mode......................................................................................... 31
Shooting Touch Controls ......................................................................................... 31
Playback Touch Controls........................................................................................... 36
2 First Steps
37
3 Basic Photography and Playback
55
4 Movie Recording and Playback
63
Attaching the Strap ......................................................................................... 38
Attaching a Lens ............................................................................................... 39
Inserting the Battery ....................................................................................... 40
Inserting Memory Cards ................................................................................ 42
Using Two Cards ............................................................................................................ 44
Compatible Memory Cards .................................................................................... 45
Charging the Battery ...................................................................................... 46
Turning the Camera On and Off ................................................................. 50
Checking the Battery Level........................................................................... 51
Basic Setup ......................................................................................................... 52
Choosing a Different Language........................................................................... 54
Changing the Time and Date ................................................................................ 54
Taking Photographs (Mode P) ..................................................................... 56
Viewing Pictures ............................................................................................... 59
HDMI Output ................................................................................................................... 60
Deleting Pictures .............................................................................................. 62
Recording Movies ............................................................................................ 64
Recording Movies ......................................................................................................... 64
Adjusting Movie Settings ......................................................................................... 68
Viewing Movies................................................................................................. 69
xii
Table of Contents
5 Taking Photographs
71
6 The Shooting Menus
127
P, S, A, and M Modes........................................................................................ 72
Mode P: Program AE ................................................................................................... 72
Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE..................................................................................... 74
Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE ................................................................................ 76
Mode M: Manual Exposure ..................................................................................... 78
FILTER .................................................................................................................................... 82
Custom Modes ............................................................................................................... 83
Autofocus ............................................................................................................ 91
Focus Mode ...................................................................................................................... 92
Autofocus Options (AF Mode) .............................................................................. 94
Focus-Point Selection................................................................................................. 96
Manual Focus...................................................................................................100
Checking Focus ........................................................................................................... 102
Sensitivity..........................................................................................................105
AUTO .................................................................................................................................. 106
Metering ............................................................................................................107
Exposure Compensation .............................................................................108
Focus/Exposure Lock ....................................................................................109
Other Controls ............................................................................................................. 110
Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode).........................................................111
Bracketing .........................................................................................................113
W ISO BKT ..................................................................................................................... 114
V WHITE BALANCE BKT ....................................................................................... 114
s Bracketing ............................................................................................................... 115
HDR .....................................................................................................................118
Panoramas ........................................................................................................120
Multiple Exposures ........................................................................................123
Pixel-Shift Multi-Shot ....................................................................................125
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) .....................................128
IMAGE SIZE ..................................................................................................................... 128
IMAGE QUALITY .......................................................................................................... 129
RAW RECORDING ....................................................................................................... 130
SELECT JPEG/HEIF...................................................................................................... 131
FILM SIMULATION ...................................................................................................... 132
xiii
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR.................................................................................. 134
GRAIN EFFECT .............................................................................................................. 134
COLOR CHROME EFFECT....................................................................................... 135
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE ..................................................................................... 135
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT ............................................................................................ 135
WHITE BALANCE ......................................................................................................... 136
DYNAMIC RANGE ....................................................................................................... 140
D RANGE PRIORITY .................................................................................................... 140
TONE CURVE.................................................................................................................. 141
COLOR ............................................................................................................................... 141
SHARPNESS .................................................................................................................... 141
HIGH ISO NR .................................................................................................................. 142
CLARITY ............................................................................................................................ 142
LONG EXPOSURE NR ................................................................................................ 142
LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER ....................................................................... 143
COLOR SPACE ............................................................................................................... 143
PIXEL MAPPING ........................................................................................................... 143
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING ..................................................................... 144
AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING.................................................................... 144
xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING ........................................................................ 144
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING .................................................................. 145
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography) ........................................................148
FOCUS AREA ................................................................................................................. 148
FOCUS MODE ............................................................................................................... 148
AF MODE ......................................................................................................................... 148
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS ....................................................................................... 149
STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION .................................................................. 153
AF POINT DISPLAY yz ...................................................................................... 153
NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS................................................................................ 153
PRE-AF ............................................................................................................................... 154
xF AF ILLUMINATOR .......................................................................................... 154
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING ................................................................. 155
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING .......................................................................... 157
AF+MF .............................................................................................................................. 159
MF ASSIST ....................................................................................................................... 160
FOCUS CHECK .............................................................................................................. 160
INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA.............................................................. 161
xiv
Table of Contents
xF INSTANT AF SETTING ................................................................................. 161
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE........................................................................... 161
RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY ................................................................................... 162
xF AF RANGE LIMITER....................................................................................... 163
TOUCH SCREEN MODE ........................................................................................... 164
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)................................................166
FILTER SETTING ............................................................................................................ 166
SPORTS FINDER MODE ........................................................................................... 166
PRE-SHOT sJ .......................................................................................................... 167
SELF-TIMER ..................................................................................................................... 168
SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING.................................................................................... 169
SELF-TIMER LAMP....................................................................................................... 169
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING ................................................................................ 170
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING........................ 171
AE BKT SETTING .......................................................................................................... 172
FILM SIMULATION BKT ............................................................................................ 172
FOCUS BKT SETTING ................................................................................................ 172
PHOTOMETRY ............................................................................................................... 172
SHUTTER TYPE.............................................................................................................. 173
FLICKER REDUCTION ................................................................................................ 174
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING ..................................................................................... 174
IS MODE ........................................................................................................................... 175
ISO ....................................................................................................................................... 175
DIGITAL TELE-CONV. ................................................................................................. 175
xF COOLING FAN SETTING ............................................................................ 176
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION................................................................ 176
FLASH SETTING (Still Photography) ........................................................177
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING ................................................................................. 177
RED EYE REMOVAL..................................................................................................... 177
TTL-LOCK MODE ......................................................................................................... 178
LED LIGHT SETTING .................................................................................................. 178
COMMANDER SETTING .......................................................................................... 179
CH SETTING ................................................................................................................... 179
MOVIE SETTING (Still Photography) ........................................................180
MOVIE MODE ................................................................................................................ 180
HIGH SPEED REC ......................................................................................................... 180
MEDIA REC SETTING................................................................................................. 180
xv
F IS MODE .................................................................................................................... 180
F IS MODE BOOST................................................................................................... 180
AUDIO SETTING........................................................................................................... 181
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording) .........................................................184
MOVIE SETTING LIST................................................................................................. 184
SHOOTING MODE ...................................................................................................... 184
MOVIE MODE ................................................................................................................ 185
HIGH SPEED REC ......................................................................................................... 186
MEDIA REC SETTING................................................................................................. 187
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING......................................................................................... 191
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION .................................................................. 192
DIGITAL ZOOM ............................................................................................................. 192
F-Log/HLG RECORDING ......................................................................................... 193
DATA LEVEL SETTING ............................................................................................... 194
F PHOTOMETRY ....................................................................................................... 194
F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING.............................................................................. 194
F IS MODE .................................................................................................................... 195
F IS MODE BOOST................................................................................................... 195
F ISO ................................................................................................................................ 196
ZEBRA SETTING ........................................................................................................... 196
ZEBRA LEVEL ................................................................................................................. 196
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL ................................................................ 197
TALLY LIGHT ................................................................................................................... 197
xF COOLING FAN SETTING ............................................................................ 198
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING...................................................................... 198
F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING ............................................................ 198
xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING ........................................................................ 198
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION................................................................ 198
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording) ......................................199
F FILM SIMULATION............................................................................................... 199
F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR .......................................................................... 199
F WHITE BALANCE .................................................................................................. 200
F DYNAMIC RANGE ................................................................................................ 200
F TONE CURVE .......................................................................................................... 200
F COLOR........................................................................................................................ 200
F SHARPNESS............................................................................................................. 201
F HIGH ISO NR ........................................................................................................... 201
xvi
Table of Contents
INTERFRAME NR .......................................................................................................... 201
F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION ............................................................. 202
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING .................................................................. 202
AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording) .........................................................203
F FOCUS AREA .......................................................................................................... 203
F FOCUS MODE ........................................................................................................ 203
F AF MODE .................................................................................................................. 204
F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING .................................................................................. 204
xF AF ILLUMINATOR .......................................................................................... 205
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING .......................................................... 205
F SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING ................................................................... 205
F AF+MF ....................................................................................................................... 205
F MF ASSIST ................................................................................................................ 206
F FOCUS CHECK ....................................................................................................... 206
xF INSTANT AF SETTING ................................................................................. 206
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE........................................................................... 206
xF AF RANGE LIMITER....................................................................................... 206
F TOUCH SCREEN MODE .................................................................................... 207
FOCUS CHECK LOCK ................................................................................................ 208
AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording).........................................................209
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT............................................................... 209
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT.............................................................. 209
MIC JACK SETTING..................................................................................................... 210
MIC LEVEL LIMITER .................................................................................................... 210
WIND FILTER .................................................................................................................. 210
LOW CUT FILTER .......................................................................................................... 210
HEADPHONES VOLUME ......................................................................................... 210
XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING................................................................................. 211
TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)................................................212
TIME CODE DISPLAY ................................................................................................. 212
START TIME SETTING ................................................................................................ 212
COUNT UP SETTING.................................................................................................. 213
DROP FRAME ................................................................................................................ 213
HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT ................................................................................... 214
xvii
7 Playback and the Playback Menu
215
8 Network/USB Setting Menus
243
9 The Setup Menus
245
The Playback Display ....................................................................................216
The DISP/BACK Button............................................................................................ 217
Viewing Pictures .............................................................................................219
Playback Zoom ............................................................................................................ 220
Multi-Frame Playback .............................................................................................. 220
The Playback Menu .......................................................................................221
SWITCH SLOT ................................................................................................................ 221
RAW CONVERSION .................................................................................................... 222
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION ...................................................................... 224
ERASE ................................................................................................................................. 225
SIMULTANEOUS DELETE......................................................................................... 227
CROP .................................................................................................................................. 227
RESIZE ................................................................................................................................ 228
PROTECT .......................................................................................................................... 229
IMAGE ROTATE ............................................................................................................. 230
VOICE MEMO SETTING............................................................................................ 231
RATING .............................................................................................................................. 232
COPY .................................................................................................................................. 233
TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE.............................................................. 234
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION................................................................ 236
SLIDE SHOW .................................................................................................................. 236
PHOTOBOOK ASSIST ................................................................................................ 237
PRINT ORDER (DPOF) ............................................................................................... 239
instax PRINTER PRINT ............................................................................................... 240
DISP ASPECT.................................................................................................................. 241
Network/USB Setting Menus .....................................................................244
USER SETTING .................................................................................................246
FORMAT............................................................................................................................ 246
b AREA SETTING..................................................................................................... 247
DATE/TIME ...................................................................................................................... 247
TIME DIFFERENCE....................................................................................................... 248
xviii
Table of Contents
Qa ............................................................................................................... 249
x MY MENU SETTING............................................................................................ 249
F MY MENU SETTING ............................................................................................ 249
SENSOR CLEANING ................................................................................................... 250
BATTERY AGE ................................................................................................................ 250
RESET ................................................................................................................................. 251
REGULATORY................................................................................................................. 251
SOUND SETTING .............................................................................................252
AF BEEP VOL. ................................................................................................................. 252
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. ............................................................................................. 252
OPERATION VOL. ......................................................................................................... 253
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME ........................................................ 253
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND .......................................................... 253
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME ............................................................... 254
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND ................................................................. 254
PLAYBACK VOLUME .................................................................................................. 254
4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK ............................................................................................. 255
SCREEN SETTING ............................................................................................256
VIEW MODE SETTING............................................................................................... 256
EVF BRIGHTNESS ......................................................................................................... 256
EVF COLOR ..................................................................................................................... 256
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT..................................................................................... 257
LCD BRIGHTNESS ........................................................................................................ 258
LCD COLOR .................................................................................................................... 258
LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT.................................................................................... 258
IMAGE DISP. .................................................................................................................... 259
AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS .......................................................................................... 259
PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE ........................................................... 260
NATURAL LIVE VIEW .................................................................................................. 260
F-Log VIEW ASSIST ..................................................................................................... 261
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING .............................................................................. 261
FRAMING GUIDELINE ............................................................................................... 262
AUTOROTATE PB.......................................................................................................... 263
FOCUS SCALE UNITS ................................................................................................ 263
APERTURE UNIT FOR CINEMA LENS................................................................ 263
DUAL DISPLAY SETTING ......................................................................................... 264
xix
DISP. CUSTOM SETTING .......................................................................................... 264
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) ....................................................................... 265
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) ...................................................................... 265
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING .................................................................. 266
INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ.......................................................................... 266
LOCATION INFO........................................................................................................... 267
SUB MONITOR SETTING ......................................................................................... 267
SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND COLOR .......................................................... 268
x Q MENU BACKGROUND ................................................................................. 269
F Q MENU BACKGROUND ................................................................................. 269
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING................................................................................270
FOCUS LEVER SETTING ........................................................................................... 270
x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU ................................................................................ 271
F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU ................................................................................ 271
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING........................................................................................ 271
POWER ZOOM LENS FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING ........................................ 271
SELECTOR BUTTON SETTING .............................................................................. 271
COMMAND DIAL SETTING ................................................................................... 272
o S.S OPERATION .................................................................................................... 272
COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION.............................................................................. 272
SHUTTER AF................................................................................................................... 273
SHUTTER AE................................................................................................................... 273
SHOOT WITHOUT LENS .......................................................................................... 273
SHOOT WITHOUT CARD......................................................................................... 274
LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING ............................................................................ 274
AE/AF-LOCK MODE ................................................................................................... 276
AWB-LOCK MODE ...................................................................................................... 276
a ISO BUTTON SETTING ...................................................................................... 277
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING ...................................................................................... 278
LOCK................................................................................................................................... 280
POWER MANAGEMENT ................................................................................281
AUTO POWER OFF ..................................................................................................... 281
PERFORMANCE ............................................................................................................ 281
EVF/LCD BOOST SETTING ..................................................................................... 282
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP. ....................................................................................... 282
SAVE DATA SETTING ......................................................................................283
FRAME NO. ..................................................................................................................... 283
xx
Table of Contents
EDIT FILE NAME ........................................................................................................... 284
x CARD SLOT SETTING ......................................................................................... 284
SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL) ........................................................................... 284
SELECT FOLDER........................................................................................................... 285
COPYRIGHT INFO........................................................................................................ 285
DEFAULT CAPTION..................................................................................................... 286
GEOTAGGING ................................................................................................................ 286
10Shortcuts
287
11Peripherals and Optional Accessories
309
Shortcut Options ............................................................................................288
MY MENU ..........................................................................................................289
MY MENU SETTING ................................................................................................... 289
The Quick Menu .............................................................................................291
The Quick Menu Display........................................................................................ 291
Viewing and Changing Settings ....................................................................... 293
Editing the Quick Menu ......................................................................................... 294
Function Controls...........................................................................................297
The Function Buttons .............................................................................................. 297
Touch-Function Gestures ...................................................................................... 303
Lens Function Buttons ............................................................................................ 306
Lenses.................................................................................................................310
Lens Parts ........................................................................................................................ 310
Lens Care ......................................................................................................................... 311
Removing Lens Caps ............................................................................................... 311
Attaching Lens Hoods ............................................................................................ 312
Lenses with Aperture Rings................................................................................. 313
Lenses with No Aperture Rings ......................................................................... 314
Lenses with O.I.S. Switches ................................................................................... 314
Manual Focus Lenses ............................................................................................... 315
Power Zoom Lenses ................................................................................................. 316
xxi
Table of Contents
External Flash Units .......................................................................................317
Flash Settings................................................................................................................ 318
EF-X8 .................................................................................................................................. 319
SYNC TERMINAL .......................................................................................................... 321
SHOE MOUNT FLASH............................................................................................... 322
COMMANDER(OPTICAL) ........................................................................................ 325
Vertical Battery Grips ....................................................................................329
Attaching the Vertical Battery Grip ................................................................. 330
Inserting and Removing Batteries ................................................................... 331
Charging the Batteries ............................................................................................ 333
File Transmitters..............................................................................................334
Attaching the File Transmitter ............................................................................ 335
Inserting and Removing Batteries ................................................................... 335
Charging the Batteries ............................................................................................ 335
Cooling Fans ....................................................................................................336
Attaching a Cooling Fan ........................................................................................ 336
Using the Fan................................................................................................................ 338
12Technical Notes
339
Accessories from Fujifilm.............................................................................340
Software for Use with Your Camera .........................................................343
Smartphone Apps ..................................................................................................... 343
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX..................................... 343
Capture One Express for Fujifilm ...................................................................... 344
Capture One for Fujifilm ........................................................................................ 344
FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in (Exclusively for Lightroom) ...... 344
FUJIFILM X Acquire ................................................................................................... 344
FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO ....................................................................................... 345
FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner ........................................................................... 345
For Your Safety ................................................................................................346
Product Care ....................................................................................................357
Cleaning the Image Sensor ........................................................................358
Firmware Updates..........................................................................................359
Checking the Firmware Version ........................................................................ 359
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................360
Warning Messages and Displays ..............................................................367
Memory Card Capacity ................................................................................371
Specifications ..................................................................................................372
xxii
Supplied Accessories
The following are included with the camera:
• NP-W235 rechargeable battery
O For reasons of safety, the battery is not charged at shipment.
The camera will not function if the battery is not charged; be
sure to charge the battery before use (P 46).
• AC-5VJ AC power adapter
• Plug adapter
• USB cable (approx. 0.6 m/2 ft.)
• Body cap (comes attached to camera)
• Shoulder strap
• Cable protector
• Hot shoe cover (comes attached to hot shoe)
• Sync terminal cap (comes attached to camera)
• File transmitter/vertical battery grip connector cover
(comes attached to camera)
• Cooling fan connector cover (comes attached to camera)
• Basic Manual
N • If you purchased a lens kit, check that a lens is included.
• The plug adapter supplied varies with the country or region.
• For information on compatible computer software, see “Software for
Use with Your Camera” (P 343).
xxiii
About This Manual
This manual contains instructions for your FUJIFILM X-H2
digital camera. Be sure you have read and understood its
contents before proceeding.
Symbols and Conventions
The following symbols are used in this manual:
O Information that should be read to prevent damage to the
product.
Additional
information that may be helpful when using the
N
product.
P Pages on which related information may be found.
Menus and other text in the displays are shown in bold. Illustrations
are for explanatory purposes only; drawings may be simplified,
while photographs are not necessarily taken with the model of
camera described in this manual.
Terminology
The optional SD, SDHC, SDXC, and Type B CFexpress memory
cards the camera uses to store pictures are referred to as “memory cards”. The electronic viewfinder may be referred to as the
“EVF” and the LCD monitor as the “LCD”. Smartphones and tablets
are referred to as “smartphones”.
xxiv
Before You Begin
1
Parts of the Camera
1
Before You Begin
A ISO button .............................................105, 297
B WB button..................................................7, 297
C Fn1 button .....................................................297
D Secondary LCD monitor................................26
E Microphone ......................................................64
F Hot shoe .........................................................318
G Diopter adjustment control .........................13
H Dial lock release .......................................56, 64
I Mode dial ............................................................8
J Strap eyelet .......................................................38
K HDMI connector cover
L Microphone jack cover
M Headphone jack cover
N Speaker .................................................... 69, 254
O USB connector cover
P Sync terminal ................................................321
Q Fn3 button .....................................................297
R Lens signal contacts
2
S Lens release button ........................................39
T Fn2 button .....................................................297
U AF-assist illuminator...................................154
V
W
X
Y
Z
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Self-timer lamp ............................................168
Tally light ........................................................197
Front command dial............................ 10, 272
ON/OFF switch .................................................50
Shutter button .................................................58
t (movie recording) button ............. 64, 297
Hot shoe cover ..............................................318
Body cap............................................................39
HDMI connector (Type A) .............................60
Microphone jack (⌀3.5mm) ........................67
Headphone jack (⌀3.5mm) ......................210
USB connector (Type-C) ...............................46
Hole to screw USB cable
Hole to screw cable protector
Parts of the Camera
1
Before You Begin
h DRIVE button......................................................9 u Memory card slot cover (detachable)
b (delete) button ...........................................62
..................................................................... 6, 42
i a (playback) button ...................................59 v Battery-chamber cover latch ......................40
j Eye sensor..........................................................19 w Battery-chamber cover .................................40
x Selector buttons ................................................7
k Electronic viewfinder (EVF)
..................................................... 14, 18, 20, 31 y MENU/OK button .............................................28
l Eye cup (lockable)...........................................13 z DISP (display)/BACK button ............... 21, 217
x(Bluetooth) button
m VIEW MODE button .........................................18
n Secondary monitor backlight button.......27 0 Q (quick menu) button ...............................291
o Focus stick (focus lever)...................7, 97, 270 1 AEL (exposure lock) button ..............110, 297
p AFON button .........................................110, 297 2 Tripod mount
q Rear command dial ....................10, 219, 272 3 LCD monitor .......................................12, 16, 18
Touch screen .................................31, 164, 207
r Indicator lamp ....................................... 11, 197
Tally light ........................................................197 4 File transmitter/vertical battery grip
connector cover ........................................330
s Remote release connector cover ................81
t Memory card slot cover latch......................42
3
1
Before You Begin
5 Remote release connector (⌀2.5mm).......81 - Battery chamber .............................................40
6 Memory card slot 2
^ Cooling fan connector cover ....................336
(for SD memory cards) ...............................42 \ Cooling fan connector ...............................336
7 Serial number plate..........................................6 $ Hole to screw cooling fan..........................336
8 Memory card slot 1
% File transmitter/vertical battery grip
(for Type B CFexpress cards)......................42
9 Battery latch ....................................................41
4
connector ...................................................330
Parts of the Camera
The Cable Protector
Attach the protector as shown to prevent accidental disconnection.
A Slide the protector over the USB connector cover so that the cover
passes through the slot in the protector.
B Tighten the lock screw.
C Connect the cable and pass it through the protector as shown.
1
Before You Begin
5
The Serial Number Plate
Do not remove the serial number plate,
which provides the CMIIT ID, serial number, and other important information.
1
Serial number plate
Before You Begin
The Memory Card Slot Cover (Detachable)
The memory card slot cover can be removed by lowering the interior latch. Remove the cover for ease of access when
a camera rig is attached or in other situations that make it difficult to open or
close the cover.
6
Parts of the Camera
The Focus Stick (Focus Lever)
Tilt or press the focus stick to select the focus area. The focus stick can also be used
to navigate the menus.
1
The Selector
Press the selector up (e), right (h),
down (f), or left (g) to highlight items.
The up, right, down, and left buttons also
double as function buttons Fn4 through
Fn7.
The WB Button
Press the WB button to access white balance settings.
7
Before You Begin
N To choose the role played by the focus stick, press and hold the center of the stick or use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FOCUS LEVER
SETTING.
The Mode Dial
To select a shooting mode, rotate the dial until
the icon for the desired mode aligns with the
index.
1
Before You Begin
Mode
A P (PROGRAM AE)
B S (SHUTTER PRIORITY AE)
A (APERTURE PRIORITY AE)
M (MANUAL)
C C1/C2/C3/C4/C5/C6/C7
(CUSTOM 1/2/3/4/5/6/7)
D FILTER (FILTER)
E F (MOVIE)
8
Description
P
Aperture and shutter speed can be
72
adjusted using program shift.
Select for full control over camera
74
settings, including aperture (M and A) 76
and/or shutter speed (M and S).
78
Take pictures using previously-stored
83
settings.
Take photos with filter effects.
82
Record movies.
64
Parts of the Camera
The DRIVE Button
Pressing the DRIVE button displays drivemode menu, where you can choose from
the following the drive modes.
1
P
56
111
111
114
114
BKT
h
u
j
p
Mode
Bracketing
HDR
Panorama
Multiple Exposure
PIXEL SHIFT MULTI SHOT
P
115
118
120
123
125
9
Before You Begin
B
J
O
W
V
Mode
Single frame
High-speed burst
Low-speed burst
ISO BKT
WHITE BALANCE BKT
The Command Dials
The rear and front command dials are used for the operations
below.
Front command dial
Rear command dial
1
Before You Begin
P
S
A
M
Shooting 1
Choose the desired combination of shutter speed and
aperture (program shift).
Choose a shutter speed.
Adjust aperture. 2
Choose a shutter speed.
FILTER Program shift.
Menus
Q Menu
Playback
Select menu tabs or page
through menus.
Select items in the quick
menu.
View other pictures.
Adjust exposure compensation.
Adjust aperture. 2
Adjust exposure compensation.
Highlight menu items.
Adjust settings in the quick
menu.
• Zoom in or out (full-frame
playback).
• Zoom in or out (multi-frame
playback).
1 Can be changed using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING.
2 Applies if the lens has no aperture ring or if an aperture ring with an “A” position is in the A
position.
N The rotation direction for the command dials can be selected using
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION.
10
Parts of the Camera
The Indicator Lamp
Camera status is shown by the indicator
lamp.
1
Blinks green and
orange
Glows orange
Blinks orange
Blinks red
Camera status
Focus locked.
Focus or slow shutter speed warning. Pictures can be taken.
• Camera on: Recording pictures, or picture displayed for confirmation after being taken with option other than OFF
selected for D SCREEN SETTING > IMAGE DISP. (additional pictures can be taken).
• Camera off: Uploading pictures to a smartphone or tablet. *
Recording pictures. No additional pictures can be taken at
this time.
Flash charging; flash will not fire when picture is taken.
Lens or memory error.
* Displayed only if pictures are selected for upload.
N • Warnings may also appear in the display.
• The indicator lamp remains off while your eye is to the viewfinder.
• The B MOVIE SETTING > TALLY LIGHT option can be used to
choose the lamp (indicator or AF-assist) that lights during movie recording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady.
11
Before You Begin
Indicator lamp
Glows green
Blinks green
The LCD Monitor
You can adjust the angle of the LCD monitor when framing shots, but be careful not
to trap your fingers or other objects.
1
Before You Begin
O • Do not apply excessive force to the hinge when rotating the LCD
monitor, as this could damage the hinge.
• Be careful that the corners of the monitor do not contact the camera
body, as this could leave marks.
N The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen that can be used for:
• Touch photography (P 32)
• Focus area selection (P 31)
• Function selection (P 34)
• Movie optimized control oL (P 33)
• Playback (P 36)
12
Parts of the Camera
The Eye Cup
To remove the eye cup, hold the buttons
on either side and slide eye cup up.
1
To focus the viewfinder:
A Lift the diopter adjustment control.
B Rotate the control to adjust viewfinder focus.
C Return the control to its original position and lock it in place.
O Lift the control before use. Failure to observe this precaution could
cause product malfunction.
13
Before You Begin
Focusing the Viewfinder
If the indicators displayed in the viewfinder are blurred, put your
eye to the viewfinder and rotate the diopter adjustment control
until the display is in sharp focus.
Camera Displays
This section lists the indicators that may be displayed
during shooting.
O For illustrative purposes, displays are shown with all indicators lit.
The Electronic Viewfinder
1
5 6
E
F LM N O P Q
R S
Before You Begin
GHIJK
W X
T U V
12/31/2022 12:10
7
4
3
2
1
0
Y
Z
a
b
z
c
d
e
y
x
w
f
rq
v ut s
14
p o
nml
k
j
i hg
Camera Displays
elapsed recording time ..............................64
U Card slot options ................................... 44, 284
V Number of available frames 1...................371
W Image size ......................................................128
X File format......................................................188
Y Image quality................................................129
Z HEIF format ...................................................131
a Date and time..................................52, 54, 247
b Touch screen mode .............................. 31, 164
c Cooling fan settings ...........................176, 198
d Temperature warning ......................... 43, 370
e Control lock 3 .................................................280
f Boost mode ...................................................282
g Power supply....................................................48
h Histogram .........................................................24
i Battery level ......................................................51
j Sensitivity .......................................................105
k Exposure compensation ............................108
l Aperture...............................................73, 76, 78
m Distance indicator 2 .....................................102
n Shutter speed .....................................73, 74, 78
o TTL lock ..................................................178, 302
p AE lock....................................................110, 276
q Metering .........................................................107
r Shooting mode ...............................................72
s Focus mode 2 ....................................................92
t Focus indicator 2 ..............................................93
u Manual focus indicator 2 .................... 92, 100
v AF lock....................................................110, 276
w Time code.......................................................212
x Microphone input channel..............183, 211
y Recording level 2 ...........................................209
z Exposure indicator................................ 78, 108
0 Virtual horizon.................................................25
1 Focus frame ............................................ 96, 109
2 FTP upload progress ...................................244
3 Image transfer status
4 Location data download status..............286
5 Depth-of-field preview........................ 77, 102
6 Proxy setting (ProRes only)........................190
7 Focus check ..........................................103, 160
1 Shows “9999” if there is space for over 9999 frames.
2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > LARGE INDICATORS
MODE(EVF).
3 Displayed when controls have been locked by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button.
Control lock can be ended by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button again.
15
1
Before You Begin
A Crop factor .....................................................192
B IS mode 2 .........................................................175
C Flash (TTL) mode .........................................322
D Flash compensation ...................................322
E Movie compression .....................................188
F Digital teleconverter ...................................175
G Self-timer indicator .....................................168
H Continuous mode........................................111
I Shutter type ...................................................173
J AF+MF indicator 2 .......................................159
K Bluetooth ON/OFF
L White balance ..............................................136
M AWB lock ........................................................276
N Film simulation ............................................132
O F-Log/HLG recording ..................................193
P Dynamic range ............................................140
Q D-range priority ...........................................140
R Movie mode ........................................... 64, 185
S High-speed recording indicator ..............186
T Recording time available/
The LCD Monitor
D E
F
G I
A BC
1
K
HJ
L
M
N OP
R S
Q
T UVW
9
8
7
6
X
Y
Before You Begin
Z
a
5
4
b
c
3
d
e
f
2
1
0
g
vu
z y x w
16
ts
r
q
po n m
l k
j ih
Camera Displays
elapsed recording time ..............................64
O Date and time..................................52, 54, 247
P Card slot options ................................... 44, 284
Q Number of available frames 1 ...................371
R Image size ......................................................128
S File format......................................................188
T Image quality................................................129
U HEIF format ...................................................131
V Cooling fan settings ...........................176, 198
W Touch screen mode 3 ............................ 31, 164
X AWB lock ........................................................276
Y White balance ..............................................136
Z Film simulation ............................................132
a F-Log/HLG recording ..................................193
b Dynamic range ............................................140
c D-range priority ...........................................140
d Movie optimized control 3.............................33
e Virtual horizon.................................................25
f Boost mode ...................................................282
g Touch zoom 3 ....................................................35
h Temperature warning ......................... 43, 370
i Control lock 4..................................................280
j Battery level ......................................................51
k Power supply....................................................48
l Sensitivity .......................................................105
m Histogram .........................................................24
n Exposure compensation ............................108
o Distance indicator 2 .....................................102
p Aperture...............................................73, 76, 78
q Time code.......................................................212
r Shutter speed .....................................73, 74, 78
s TTL lock ..................................................178, 302
t AE lock....................................................110, 276
u Metering .........................................................107
v Shooting mode ...............................................72
w Focus mode 2 ....................................................92
x Focus indicator 2 ..............................................93
y Manual focus indicator 2 .................... 92, 100
z AF lock....................................................110, 276
0 Microphone input channel..............183, 211
1 AF+MF indicator 2 .......................................159
2 Shutter type ...................................................173
3 Recording level 2 ...........................................209
4 Continuous mode........................................111
5 Self-timer indicator .....................................168
6 Exposure indicator................................ 78, 108
7 Flash (TTL) mode .........................................322
8 Flash compensation ...................................322
9 IS mode 2 .........................................................175
1 Shows “9999” if there is space for over 9999 frames.
2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > LARGE INDICATORS
MODE(LCD).
3 Camera functions can also be accessed via touch controls.
4 Displayed when controls have been locked by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button.
Control lock can be ended by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button again.
17
1
Before You Begin
A Crop factor .....................................................192
B Location data download status..............286
C Focus check ..........................................103, 160
D Depth-of-field preview........................ 77, 102
E Proxy setting (ProRes only)........................190
F Movie compression .....................................188
G Digital teleconverter ...................................175
H Image transfer status
I Bluetooth ON/OFF
J FTP upload progress ...................................244
K Movie mode ........................................... 64, 185
L High-speed recording indicator ..............186
M Focus frame ............................................ 96, 109
N Recording time available/
Choosing a Display Mode
Press the VIEW MODE button to cycle
through the following display modes.
You can choose separate display modes
for shooting and playback.
1
SHOOTING
Before You Begin
Option
Description
Putting your eye to the viewfinder turns the viewfinder
on and the LCD monitor off ; taking your eye away turns
E EYE SENSOR
the viewfinder off and LCD monitor on.
LCD ONLY
LCD monitor on, viewfinder off.
EVF ONLY
Viewfinder on, LCD monitor off.
Putting your eye to the viewfinder turns the viewfinder
on; taking it away turns the viewfinder off. The LCD
EVF ONLY + E
monitor remains off.
Putting your eye to the viewfinder during shooting
turns the viewfinder on, but the LCD monitor is used for
E EYE SENSOR + LCD the display of images once you remove your eye from
the viewfinder after shooting. The options selected for
IMAGE DISP.
D SCREEN SET-UP > IMAGE DISP. apply to display
in the LCD monitor.
18
Camera Displays
PLAYBACK
Option
E EYE SENSOR
LCD ONLY
EVF ONLY
Description
Putting your eye to the viewfinder turns the viewfinder
on and the LCD monitor off ; taking your eye away turns
the viewfinder off and LCD monitor on.
LCD monitor on, viewfinder off.
Viewfinder on, LCD monitor off.
button then used to switch between the EVF ONLY and LCD ONLY
displays.
The Eye Sensor
The eye sensor may respond to objects other
than your eye or to light shining directly on the
sensor.
Eye sensor
19
Before You Begin
N • Use D SCREEN SET-UP > VIEW MODE SETTING in the setup menu
to choose a display mode for the EVF and LCD monitor.
• EVF/LCD SWITCH can be assigned to a function button and the
1
Adjusting Display Brightness
The brightness and saturation of the viewfinder and LCD monitor
can be adjusted using the items in the D SCREEN SET-UP menu.
Choose EVF BRIGHTNESS or EVF COLOR to adjust viewfinder
brightness or saturation, LCD BRIGHTNESS or LCD COLOR to do
the same for the LCD monitor.
1
Before You Begin
Display Rotation
When ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > AUTOROTATE
DISPLAYS, the indicators in the viewfinder and LCD monitor automatically rotate to match camera orientation.
20
Camera Displays
The DISP/BACK Button
The DISP/BACK button controls the display
of indicators in the viewfinder and LCD
monitor.
N Indicators for the EVF and LCD must be
selected separately. To choose the EVF display, place your eye to the viewfinder while
using the DISP/BACK button.
1
Before You Begin
Viewfinder
Full screen
Standard indicators
Dual display
(manual focus mode only)
21
LCD Monitor
Standard indicators
1
No indicators
12800
Before You Begin
12800
Dual display
(manual focus mode only)
Info display
The Dual Display
The dual display consists of a large full-frame window and a
smaller close-up of the focus area.
22
Camera Displays
Customizing the Standard Display
To choose the items shown in the standard indicator display:
Display standard indicators.
Use the DISP/BACK button to display standard indicators.
2
Select DISP. CUSTOM SETTING.
Select D SCREEN SET-UP > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING in the
setup menu.
3
Choose items.
Highlight items and press MENU/OK to select or deselect.
• FRAMING GUIDELINE
• FOCUS FRAME
• AF DISTANCE INDICATOR
• MF DISTANCE INDICATOR
• HISTOGRAM
• LIVE VIEW HIGHLIGHT ALERT
• SHOOTING MODE
• APERTURE/S-SPEED/ISO
• INFORMATION BACKGROUND
• Expo. Comp. (Digit)
• Expo. Comp. (Scale)
• FOCUS MODE
• PHOTOMETRY
• SHUTTER TYPE
• FLASH
• CONTINUOUS MODE
4
5
• DUAL IS MODE
• TOUCH SCREEN MODE
• WHITE BALANCE
• FILM SIMULATION
• DYNAMIC RANGE
• BOOST MODE
• COOLING FAN SETTING
• FRAMES REMAINING
• IMAGE SIZE/QUALITY
• MOVIE MODE & REC. TIME
• DIGITAL TELE-CONV.
• IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
• MIC LEVEL
• GUIDANCE MESSAGE
• BATTERY LEVEL
• FRAMING OUTLINE
Press DISP/BACK to save changes.
Press DISP/BACK as needed to exit the menus and return to the
shooting display.
23
1
Before You Begin
1
Framing Outline
Enable FRAMING OUTLINE to make the borders of the frame easier to see
against dark backgrounds.
Histograms
Histograms show the distribution of tones in the image. Brightness is
shown by the horizontal axis, the number of pixels by the vertical axis.
1
Number of pixels
Before You Begin
Shadows
Highlights
Pixel brightness
• Optimal exposure: Pixels are distributed in an even curve
throughout the tone range.
• Overexposed: Pixels are clustered on the right side of
the graph.
• Underexposed: Pixels are clustered on the left side of
the graph.
To view separate RGB histograms and a display showing areas of the frame that will be
overexposed at current settings superimposed
on the view through the lens, press the function button to which HISTOGRAM is assigned
(P 271, 297).
A Overexposed areas blink
B RGB histograms
24
Camera Displays
Virtual Horizon
Check whether the camera is level. The display type can be chosen using D SCREEN SET-UP > ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING.
Use the virtual horizon to level the camera when mounting it on
a tripod or the like.
2D
3D
1
Roll
• OFF: The virtual horizon is not displayed.
• 2D: A white line shows the amount the camera is tilted
left or right. The line turns green when the camera is level.
The line may vanish if the camera is tilted forward or back.
• 3D: The display shows whether the camera is tilted left or
right and forward or back.
N ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH can be assigned to a function button
and the button then used to switch between the 2D and 3D displays.
25
Before You Begin
Pitch
The Secondary LCD Monitor
Among the settings that can be viewed
in the secondary LCD monitor are shutter
speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity. Different settings are displayed in still photography and movie modes.
1
Before You Begin
Secondary LCD monitor
Default Settings
By default, the secondary LCD monitor displays the settings listed below.
N The settings displayed can be selected using D SCREEN SET-UP >
SUB MONITOR SETTING.
Still Photography Mode
A
B
C
D
26
SHUTTER SPEED
APERTURE
EXPO. COMP.
ISO
Default
E FILM SIMULATION
F WHITE BALANCE
G IMAGE SIZE
H SHOOTING MODE
Camera Displays
Movie Mode
1
MOVIE MODE
REC. TIME
EXPO. COMP.
ISO
Before You Begin
A
B
C
D
Default
E FILM SIMULATION
F WHITE BALANCE
G CARD SLOT OPTIONS
H BATTERY LEVEL
The Secondary Monitor Backlight Button
To turn on the secondary LCD monitor backlight when you find the secondary LCD monitor
too dark to read, press the secondary monitor
backlight button. Press the button again to turn
the backlight off.
Background Color
The background color (black or white) for the secondary LCD monitor can
be selected using the D SCREEN SET-UP > SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND
COLOR option in the D (setup) menu. Note that the background is displayed in white whenever the secondary LCD monitor backlight is on.
27
Using the Menus
To display the menus, press MENU/OK.
1
Before You Begin
The Menus
Different menus are displayed during still photography, movie
recording, and playback.
Still Photography (All Modes Except F)
Pressing MENU/OK during still photography displays the photo
menus.
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
FILM SIMULATION
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
EXIT
N In modes C1 through C7, photo menus will be displayed if x STILL
is selected for the chosen bank using either H IMAGE QUALITY
SETTING > xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING in the photo menus or
B MOVIE SETTING > xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING in the movie
menus (P 83).
28
Using the Menus
Movie Recording (F/Movie Mode)
Pressing MENU/OK in movie mode displays the movie menus.
MOVIE SETTING
MOVIE SETTING LIST
SHOOTING MODE
MOVIE MODE
HIGH SPEED REC
MEDIA REC SETTING
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
DIGITAL ZOOM
1
N In modes C1 through C7, photo menus will be displayed if F MOVIE
is selected for the chosen bank using either H IMAGE QUALITY
SETTING > xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING in the photo menus or
B MOVIE SETTING > xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING in the movie
menus (P 83).
Playback
Pressing MENU/OK during playback displays the playback menu.
PLAY BACK MENU
SWITCH SLOT
RAW CONVERSION
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION
ERASE
SIMULTANEOUS DELETE
CROP
RESIZE
PROTECT
EXIT
29
Before You Begin
EXIT
Using the Menus
Selecting a Menu Tab
To navigate the menus:
1
Press MENU/OK to display the menus.
1
Before You Begin
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
FILM SIMULATION
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
EXIT
2
Press the focus stick (focus lever)
left to highlight the tab for the current menu.
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
FILM SIMULATION
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
EXIT
Tab
3
Press the focus stick up or down to highlight the tab containing the desired item.
4
Press the focus stick right to place the cursor in the menu.
N Use the front command dial to select menu tabs or page through
menus and the rear command dial to highlight menu items.
30
Touch Screen Mode
The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen.
TOUCH SCREEN SETTINGS
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
DOUBLE TAP SETTING
ON
TOUCH FUNCTION
OFF
TOUCH ZOOM
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
EVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS
EVF
The LCD monitor can be used to select the focus area while pictures are being framed in the electronic viewfinder (EVF). Use
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING > EVF
TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS to choose the area of the monitor employed for touch controls.
N • When FACE DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING >
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING, you can choose the face used
for focus.
• You can choose the type of subject on which the camera preferentially focuses when SUBJECT DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF
SETTING > SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING.
31
1
Before You Begin
Shooting Touch Controls
To enable touch controls, select ON for
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH
SCREEN SETTING > x TOUCH SCREEN
SETTING.
LCD Monitor
The operation performed can be selected
by tapping the touch screen mode indicator in the display. Touch controls can be
used for the following operations:
1
Mode
Description
Before You Begin
Tap your subject in the display to focus and release the shutter.
TOUCH
In burst mode, pictures will be taken while you keep your finger
SHOOTING
on the display.
• If SINGLE AF is selected for focus mode, the camera will foAF
AF OFF
cus when you tap your subject in the display. Focus locks at
the current distance until you tap the AF OFF icon.
• If CONTINUOUS AF is selected for focus mode, the camera
will initiate focus when you tap your subject in the display.
The camera will continue to adjust focus for changes in the
distance to the subject until you tap the AF OFF icon.
• When MANUAL FOCUS is selected for focus mode, you can
tap the display to focus on the selected subject using autofocus.
AREA
Tap to select a point for focus or zoom. The focus frame will
move to the selected point.
OFF
Touch screen mode off.
O • The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode.
• Different touch controls are used during focus zoom (P 165).
N • To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indicator, se-
lect OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING >
x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING.
• Touch control settings can be adjusted using G AF/MF SETTING > TOUCH
SCREEN MODE. For information on the touch controls available during movie recording, see “Movie Recording (F TOUCH SCREEN MODE; P 207)”.
32
Touch Screen Mode
• SHUTTER SPEED
• APERTURE
• EXPOSURE COMPENSATION
• ISO
• INTERNAL MIC LEVEL
ADJUSTMENT/EXTERNAL MIC
LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
Movie-optimized
mode button
• WIND FILTER
• HEADPHONES VOLUME
• F FILM SIMULATION
• F WHITE BALANCE
• F IS MODE
• F IS MODE BOOST
• F FOCUS MODE
N • Enabling movie-optimized controls disables the aperture ring.
• When movie-optimized control is enabled, the movie-optimized mode
button can be used to change shooting settings or disable movie-optimized control.
33
1
Before You Begin
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
Selecting ON for B MOVIE SETTING >
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL or
tapping the movie-optimized mode button in the shooting display optimizes the
command dials and touch controls for
movie recording. This can be used to prevent camera sounds being recorded with
movie footage.
1
Before You Begin
Touch Function
Functions can be assigned to the following flick gestures in much the same way
as function buttons (P 297):
• Flick up: T-Fn1
• Flick left: T-Fn2
• Flick right: T-Fn3
• Flick down: T-Fn4
N • In some cases, touch-function flick ges-
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
tures display a menu; tap to select the
desired option.
SET
CANCEL
• Touch-function gestures are disabled by default. To enable
touch-function gestures, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING >
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING > c TOUCH FUNCTION.
34
Touch Screen Mode
Touch Zoom
If the lens supports touch zoom, you can
zoom in and out by touching the display.
Tap the touch zoom button in the display
to enable touch zoom.
1
Button
Touch zoom
Zoom in
Zoom out
Before You Begin
Touch zoom is controlled using the buttons in the display.
Description
Enable touch zoom.
Zoom in or out. Touch and hold to zoom in or out at a constant
speed.
Rocker switch
The camera zooms in or out at a speed corresponding to the
position of the rocker switch.
Disable
Disable touch zoom.
N The rate at which the camera zooms in and out in response to the
T and W buttons can be selected using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING >
LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING > CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (Fn).
35
Touch Screen Mode
Playback Touch Controls
When ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH
SCREEN SETTING > a TOUCH SCREEN SETTING, touch controls
can be used for the following playback operations:
• Swipe: Swipe a finger across the display to
1
view other images.
Before You Begin
• Pinch-out: Place two fingers on the display
and spread them apart to zoom in.
• Pinch-in: Place two fingers on the display
and slide them together to zoom out.
N Pictures can be zoomed out until the entire image is visible but no
further.
• Double-tap: Tap the display twice to zoom in
on the focus point.
• Drag: View other areas of the image during
playback zoom.
36
First Steps
37
Attaching the Strap
Attach the strap.
Attach the strap to the two strap eyelets as shown below.
2
First Steps
O To avoid dropping the camera, be sure the strap is correctly secured.
38
Attaching a Lens
The camera can be used with lenses for the FUJIFILM
X-mount.
Remove the body cap from the camera
and the rear cap from the lens. Place the
lens on mount, keeping the marks on the
lens and camera aligned (A), and then
rotate the lens until it clicks into place
(B).
2
Removing Lenses
To remove the lens, turn the camera off, then
press the lens release button (A) and rotate
the lens as shown (B).
O To prevent dust accumulating on the lens
or inside the camera, replace the lens caps
and camera body cap when the lens is not
attached.
Lenses and Other Optional Accessories
The camera can be used with lenses and accessories for the FUJIFILM
X-mount.
O Observe the following precautions when attaching or removing (exchanging) lenses.
• Check that the lenses are free of dust and other foreign matter.
• Do not change lenses in direct sunlight or under another bright light
source. Light focused into the interior of the camera could cause it to
malfunction.
• Attach the lens caps before exchanging lenses.
• See the manual provided with the lens for information on use.
39
First Steps
O • When attaching lenses, ensure that dust or other foreign matter does
not enter the camera.
• Be careful not to touch the camera’s internal parts.
• Rotate the lens until it clicks securely into place.
• Do not press the lens release button while attaching the lens.
Inserting the Battery
Insert the battery in the camera as described below.
1
Open the battery-chamber cover.
Slide the battery-chamber cover
latch as shown and open the battery-chamber cover.
O • Do
not open the battery-chamber
cover when the camera is on. Failure to observe this precaution could
damage image files or memory
cards.
• Do not use excessive force when
handling the battery-chamber cover.
2
First Steps
2
Insert the battery as shown.
O • Insert the battery in the orientation
shown. Do not use force or attempt
to insert the battery upside down or
backwards.
• Confirm that the battery is securely
latched.
40
Inserting the Battery
3
Close the battery-chamber cover.
Close and latch the cover.
O If the cover does not close, check that
the battery is in the correct orientation. Do not attempt to force the cover shut.
O The battery may become hot when used in high-temperature environments. Observe caution when removing the battery.
41
2
First Steps
Removing the Battery
Before removing the battery, turn the camera off and open the battery-chamber cover.
To remove the battery, press the battery latch
to the side, and slide the battery out of the
camera as shown.
Inserting Memory Cards
Pictures are stored on memory cards (sold separately).
N The camera is equipped with two memory card slots. Use Slot 1 with
CFexpress cards and Slot 2 with SD, SDHC, or SDXC cards.
1
Open the memory card slot cover.
Unlatch and open the cover.
2
First Steps
O Do not turn the camera off or remove the memory card while the
memory card is being formatted or data are being recorded to or deleted from the card. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card.
2
Insert the memory card.
Holding the card in the orientation
shown, slide it in until it clicks into
place at the back of the slot. Close
and latch the memory card slot cover.
O Be sure card is in the correct orientation; do not insert at an angle
or use force.
42
Inserting Memory Cards
Removing Memory Cards
Turn the camera off and open the memory card
slot cover. Eject the card by pressing it in with a
finger and then slowly releasing it; the card can
then be removed by hand.
O • Press the center of the card.
• Suddenly removing your finger from the card could cause the card to
fall from the slot. Remove your finger slowly.
touch. Wait for the card to cool before removing it.
43
2
First Steps
• If the camera displays a p icon, the memory card may be hot to the
Using Two Cards
The camera can be used with two cards, one in each of its two
slots. At default settings, photos are saved to the card in the second slot only when the card in the first slot is full. This can be
changed using D SAVE DATA SET-UP > x CARD SLOT SETTING.
Option
2
First Steps
Description
The card in the second slot is used only when the card in
the first slot is full. If the second slot is selected for D SAVE
SEQUENTIAL DATA SET-UP > SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL),
(default) recording will start on the card in the second slot and
switch to the first slot when the card in the second slot
is full.
BACKUP
Display
Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card.
RAW pictures are recorded to the card in the first slot
and JPEG or HEIF pictures to the card in the second slot. RAW+JPEG
SEPARATE This setting takes effect only when FINE + RAW or
NORMAL + RAW is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY
SETTING > IMAGE QUALITY.
RAW+HEIF
The card used to store movies can be selected using B MOVIE
SETTING > MEDIA REC SETTING.
44
Inserting Memory Cards
O • Do not turn the camera off or remove the memory card while the memo-
ry card is being formatted or data are being recorded to or deleted from
the card. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card.
• Memory cards can be locked, making it
impossible to format the card or to record
or delete images. Before inserting a memory card, slide the write-protect switch to
the unlocked position.
• Memory cards are small and can be swallowed; keep out of reach of
children. If a child swallows a memory card, seek medical assistance
immediately.
• miniSD or microSD adapters that are larger or smaller than memory
cards may not eject normally; if the card does not eject, take the camera to an authorized service representative. Do not forcibly remove
the card.
• Do not affix labels or other objects to memory cards. Peeling labels
can cause camera malfunction.
• Movie recording may be interrupted with some types of memory card.
• Formatting a memory card in the camera creates a folder in which
pictures are stored. Do not rename or delete this folder or use a computer or other device to edit, delete, or rename image files. Always
use the camera to delete pictures; before editing or renaming files,
copy them to a computer and edit or rename the copies, not the
originals. Renaming the files on the camera can cause problems
during playback.
45
2
First Steps
Compatible Memory Cards
• The camera can be used with SD, SDHC, SDXC, and CFexpress
Type B memory cards. Both the UHS-I and UHS-II bus interfaces
are supported.
• CFexpress or UHS-II memory cards are recommended for highspeed burst photography.
• The types of memory cards suitable for movie recording vary
with the settings selected (P 68).
• A list of supported memory cards is available on the Fujifilm
website. For details, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/.
Charging the Battery
For reasons of safety, the battery is not charged at shipment. The camera will not function if the battery is not
charged; be sure to charge the battery before use. Before
charging the battery, turn the camera off.
O • An NP-W235 rechargeable battery is supplied with the camera.
• Charging takes about 180 minutes.
2
1
First Steps
Attach the plug adapter to the AC power adapter.
Attach the plug adapter as shown, making
sure that it is fully inserted and clicks into
place on the AC power adapter terminals.
O • The supplied plug adapter is for use exclu-
sively with the AC-5VJ AC power adapter.
Do not use it with other devices.
• The shape of the plug adapter varies with
the country of sale.
2
Charge the battery.
Connect the camera to the supplied AC power adapter using
the supplied USB cable. Then plug the AC power adapter into
an indoor power outlet.
O • Connect the cable to the camera’s USB connector (Type-C).
• Be sure the connectors are fully inserted.
46
Charging the Battery
Charge Status
The indicator lamp shows battery charge status
as follows:
Indicator lamp
Battery status
On
Battery charging
Off
Charging complete
Blinks
Charging error
2
First Steps
47
O • The supplied AC power adapter is compatible with power supplies of
100 to 240 V (a plug adapter may be needed for overseas use).
• Do not use the AC power adapter or USB cable with other devices, as
this could cause malfunction.
• Do not affix labels or other objects to the battery. Failure to observe
this precaution could make it impossible to remove the battery from
the camera.
• Do not short the battery terminals. The battery could overheat.
• Read the cautions in “The Battery and Power Supply”.
• Use only genuine Fujifilm rechargeable batteries designated for use
in this camera. Failure to observe this precaution could result in product malfunction.
• Do not remove the labels from the battery or attempt to split or peel
the outer casing.
• The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use. Charge the
battery one or two days before use.
• If the battery fails to hold a charge, it has reached the end of its
charging life and must be replaced.
• Unplug the AC power adapter from the power outlet when it is not
in use.
• If the battery is left for long periods without charging, you may find
that its quality degrades or that it no longer holds a charge. Charge
the battery regularly.
• Remove dirt from the battery terminals with a clean, dry cloth. Failure
to observe this precaution could prevent the battery from charging.
• Note that charging times increase at low or high temperatures.
• Selecting ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > Bluetooth
ON/OFF in the network/USB settings menu increases the drain on
the battery.
2
First Steps
N • If the camera is turned on during charging,
charging will end and the USB connection
will instead be used to power the camera.
The battery level will begin to gradually
decline.
• The camera will display a “power supply” icon when powered via USB.
48
Charging the Battery
Charging via Computer
The camera can be charged via USB. USB charging is available with computers with a manufacturer-approved operating system and USB interface.
2
First Steps
Leave the computer on during charging.
The
battery
will not charge while the camera is on.
O•
• Connect the supplied USB cable.
• Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not use a USB hub
or keyboard.
• Charging stops if the computer enters sleep mode. To resume
charging, activate the computer and disconnect and reconnect the
USB cable.
• Charging may not be supported depending on the model of computer, computer settings, and the computer’s current state.
• The battery takes about 600 minutes to charge with a charging input
of 5 V/500 mA.
49
Turning the Camera On and Off
Use the ON/OFF switch to turn the camera on and off.
Slide the switch to ON to turn the camera
on, or to OFF to turn the camera off.
2
O Fingerprints and other marks on the lens or viewfinder can affect pic-
First Steps
tures or the view through the viewfinder. Keep the lens and viewfinder
clean.
N • Pressing the a button during shooting starts playback.
• Press the shutter button halfway to return to shooting mode.
• The camera will turn off automatically if no operations are performed
for the length of time selected for D POWER MANAGEMENT >
AUTO POWER OFF. To reactivate the camera after it has turned off
automatically, press the shutter button halfway or turn the ON/OFF
switch to OFF and then back to ON.
50
Checking the Battery Level
After turning the camera on, check the battery level in the
display.
Battery level is shown as follows:
2
Description
Battery partially discharged.
Battery about 80% full.
Battery about 60% full.
Battery about 40% full.
Battery about 20% full.
First Steps
Indicator
e
f
g
h
i
i
(red)
j
(blinks red)
Low battery. Charge as soon as possible.
Battery exhausted. Turn camera off and recharge battery.
51
Basic Setup
When you turn the camera on for the first time, you can
choose a language and set the camera clock. Follow the
steps below when turning the camera on for the first time.
1
Turn the camera on.
A language-selection dialog will be
displayed.
2
Choose a language.
Highlight a language and press
MENU/OK.
3
Choose a time zone.
When prompted, choose a time zone
and turn daylight savings time on
or off using the focus stick (focus lever), then highlight SET and press
MENU/OK.
2
First Steps
AREA SETTING
BERLIN/PARIS
AREA SETTING
GMT ±0:00
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
SET
OFF
NO
N To skip this step, press DISP/BACK.
52
Basic Setup
4
Set the clock.
DATE/TIME
GMT +1:00 BERLIN/PARIS
2022 . 12 . 31 12 00 AM 12h
SET
5
2
First Steps
View information on the smartphone app.
APPLICATION
• The camera will display a QR code
you can scan with your smartphone
IMAGES CAN BE EASILY TRANSFERRED
TO THE SMARTPHONE.
to open a website where you can
download the smartphone app.
• Press MENU/OK to exit to the shooting display.
NO
SCAN QR CODE TO ACQUIRE THE APP.
SET
N Use the smartphone app to download pictures from the camera
or control the camera remotely.
6
Format the memory card (P 246).
O Format memory cards before first use, and be sure to reformat all
memory cards after using them in a computer or other device.
N If the battery is removed for an extended period, the camera clock will
be reset and the language-selection dialog will be displayed when the
camera is turned on.
53
Basic Setup
Choosing a Different Language
To change the language:
2
1
Display language options.
Select D USER SETTING > Qa.
2
Choose a language.
Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK.
Changing the Time and Date
To set the camera clock:
First Steps
1
Display DATE/TIME options.
Select D USER SETTING > DATE/TIME.
2
Set the clock.
Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to highlight the
year, month, day, hour, or minute and press up or down to
change. Press MENU/OK to set the clock.
54
Basic Photography and
Playback
55
Taking Photographs (Mode P)
This section describes how to take pictures using program
AE (mode P). See pages 72–81 for information on S, A,
and M modes.
1
3
Rotate the mode dial to P.
O Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to
Basic Photography and Playback
release the dial.
2
56
Confirm that P appears in the display.
Taking Photographs (Mode P)
3
Ready the camera.
• Hold the camera steady with both
hands and brace your elbows
against your sides. Shaking or unsteady hands can blur your shots.
• To prevent pictures that are out of
focus or too dark (underexposed),
keep your fingers and other objects
away from the lens and AF-assist
illuminator.
Basic Photography and Playback
4
3
Frame the picture.
Lenses with Zoom Rings
Use the zoom ring to frame the picture in
the display. Rotate the ring left to zoom
out, right to zoom in.
A
57
Taking Photographs (Mode P)
5
Focus.
Press the shutter button halfway to
set focus and exposure.
Focus indicator
Focus frame
• If the camera is able to focus, the focus frame and focus indicator
will glow green.
• If the camera is unable to focus, the focus frame will turn red, s
will be displayed, and the focus indicator will blink white.
3
Basic Photography and Playback
N • If the subject is poorly lit, the AF-assist illuminator may light to
assist the focus operation.
• Focus and exposure will lock when the shutter button is
pressed halfway. Focus and exposure remain locked while the
button is kept in this position (AF/AE lock).
• The camera will focus on subjects at any distance in the macro
and standard focus ranges for the lens.
6
58
Shoot.
Smoothly press the shutter button the rest of the way down
to take the picture.
Viewing Pictures
Pictures can be viewed in the viewfinder or LCD monitor.
To view pictures full frame, press a.
100-0001
N Pictures taken using other cameras are marked with a m (“gift image”)
icon to warn that they may not display correctly and that playback
zoom may not be available.
Two Memory Cards
If two memory cards are inserted, you can press and hold the a button
to choose a card for playback. You can also select a card using the C PLAY
BACK MENU > SWITCH SLOT option.
59
3
Basic Photography and Playback
Additional pictures can be viewed by pressing the focus stick (focus lever) left or right or rotating the front command dial. Press
the focus stick or rotate the dial right to view pictures in the order
recorded, left to view pictures in reverse order. Keep the focus
stick pressed to scroll rapidly to the desired frame.
HDMI Output
Camera shooting and playback displays can be output to HDMI
devices.
Connecting to HDMI Devices
Connect the camera to TVs or other HDMI devices using a
third-party HDMI cable.
1
2
3
Turn the camera off.
Connect the cable as shown below.
Basic Photography and Playback
Insert into
HDMI connector
Insert into HDMI
connector (Type A)
3
Configure the device for HDMI input as described in the documentation supplied with the device.
4
Turn the camera on. The contents of the camera display will
be shown on the HDMI device. The camera display turns off
in playback mode (P 61).
O • Making sure the connectors are fully inserted.
• Use an HDMI cable no more than 1.5 m (4.9 ft.) long.
60
Viewing Pictures
Shooting
Display live view or movie footage on a TV or save it to an external recorder that supports HDMI input.
Playback
To start playback, press the camera a button. The camera monitor turns off and pictures and movies are output to the HDMI
device. Note that the camera volume controls have no effect on
sounds played on the TV; use the television volume controls to
adjust the volume.
N Some televisions may briefly display a black screen when movie playback begins.
3
Basic Photography and Playback
61
Deleting Pictures
Use the b button to delete pictures.
O Deleted pictures cannot be recovered. Protect important pictures or
copy them to a computer or other storage device before proceeding.
1
With a picture displayed full frame, press the b button and
select FRAME.
ERASE
FRAME
SELECTED FRAMES
ALL FRAMES
3
Basic Photography and Playback
2
Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to scroll through
pictures and press MENU/OK to delete (a confirmation dialog is
not displayed). Repeat to delete additional pictures.
N • Protected pictures cannot be deleted. Remove protection from any
pictures you wish to delete (P 229).
• Pictures can also be deleted from the menus using the C PLAY BACK
MENU > ERASE option (P 225).
62
Movie Recording and
Playback
63
Recording Movies
Record movies with sound.
Recording Movies
Movies can be recorded by pressing the t (movie recording)
button or rotating the mode dial to F (movie).
The t (Movie Recording) Button
Use the t (movie recording) button to quickly and easily record
movies while in still photography mode.
N The camera automatically selects CONTINUOUS AF for focus mode.
4
1
Press t to start recording.
Movie Recording and Playback
•A
recording indicator (V) is displayed while recording is in progress.
• The time remaining is shown by a
countdown display, while another
display counts up to show the reRecording time
cording time.
Time remaining
2
64
Press t again to end recording.
Recording ends automatically when the maximum length is
reached or the memory card is full.
Recording Movies
F (Movie) Mode
For more control over camera settings, rotate the mode dial to
F (movie) and record movies using the shutter button.
1
Rotate the mode dial to F (movie).
O Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to
release the dial.
2
Press the shutter button to start recording.
• A recording indicator (V) is displayed while recording is in progress.
• The time remaining is shown by a
countdown display, while another
display counts up to show the reRecording time
cording time.
4
3
Press the shutter button again to end recording.
Recording ends automatically when the maximum length is
reached or the memory card is full.
65
Movie Recording and Playback
Time remaining
O • Sound is recorded via the built-in microphone or an optional external
microphone. Do not cover the microphone during recording.
• Note that the microphone may pick up lens noise and other sounds
made by the camera during recording.
• Vertical or horizontal streaks may appear in movies containing very
bright subjects. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
N • The indicator lamp lights while recording is in progress (the B MOVIE
SETTING > TALLY LIGHT option can be used to choose the lamp—
indicator or AF-assist—that lights during movie recording and
whether the lamp blinks or remains steady). During recording, you
can change exposure compensation by up to ±2 EV and adjust zoom
using the zoom ring on the lens (if available).
• While recording is in progress, you can:
- Adjust sensitivity
- Refocus using any of the following methods:
• Press the shutter button halfway
• Press a function button to which AF-ON is assigned
• Use touch screen controls
- Display a histogram or artificial horizon by pressing the button to
which HISTOGRAM or ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH has been assigned
• Recording may be unavailable at some settings, while in other cases
settings may not apply during recording.
• To choose the focus area for movie recording, select G AF/MF
SETTING > FOCUS AREA and use the focus stick (focus lever) and
rear command dial (P 96).
4
Movie Recording and Playback
66
Recording Movies
Temperature Warnings
The camera automatically turns off to protect itself when its temperature or
the temperature of the battery rises. If a temperature warning is displayed,
image noise may increase. Turn the camera off and wait for it to cool before
turning it on again.
Using an External Microphone
Sound can be recorded with external microphones that connect using jacks 3.5 mm in
diameter; microphones that require plug-in
power cannot be used. See the microphone
manual for details.
XLR Microphone Adapters
The camera can be used with TEAC TASCAM CA-XLR2d-F XLR microphone
adapters. For more information, visit the TASCAM website.
https://tascam.jp/int/product/ca-xlr2d/#CA-XLR2d_Website
4
Movie Recording and Playback
67
Recording Movies
Adjusting Movie Settings
4
Movie Recording and Playback
Movie settings can be adjusted from the movie menus or using the
B MOVIE SETTING item in the photo menus (P 28).
• Use the B MOVIE SETTING item in the photo menus to quickly adjust settings when recording movies via the t (movie recording)
button (P 180).
• The movie menus contain options for use when recording movies
via the shutter button in F (movie) mode (P 184).
• Settings such as frame rate and frame size can be adjusted using
MOVIE MODE.
• Use MEDIA REC SETTING for such tasks as choosing the file type,
bit rate, and the destination card slot.
• Focus mode is selected using G AF/MF SETTING > F FOCUS
MODE in the movie menus. Regardless of the option selected, the
camera will automatically switch to CONTINUOUS AF when FACE
DETECTION ON or SUBJECT DETECTION ON is chosen for G AF/
MF SETTING > g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING or SUBJECT
DETECTION SETTING. Note, however, that choosing MANUAL
FOCUS when FACE DETECTION ON or SUBJECT DETECTION ON is
selected disables face and subject detection.
O • Changes made using the B MOVIE SETTING item in the photo
menus also apply to the movie menus. Changes made in one set of
menus automatically apply in the other.
• The type of memory card supported varies with the option select for
B MOVIE SETTING > MEDIA REC SETTING.
- Record ProRes movies to CFexpress cards.
- Movies with a bit rate of 720 Mbps can be recorded to CFexpress
cards or to cards with a Video Speed Class of V90 or better.
- Movies with a bit rate of 360 Mbps can be recorded to CFexpress
cards or to cards with a Video Speed Class of V60 or better.
- Movies with a bit rate of 100 or 200 Mbps can be recorded to
CFexpress cards or to cards with a UHS Speed Class of 3 or better.
Depth of Field
Choose low f-numbers to soften background details. Aperture can be adjusted when A (aperture-priority AE) or M (manual) is selected for B MOVIE
SETTING > SHOOTING MODE.
68
Viewing Movies
View movies on the camera.
In full-frame playback, movies are identified by a W icon. Press the focus stick (focus lever) down to start movie playback.
PLAY
AUDIO SET.
The following operations can be performed while a movie is displayed:
4
Left/right
View other pictures
Playback in
progress ((x
x)
Playback
paused (y
(y)
End playback
Pause playback
Adjust speed
Start/resume playback
Single frame rewind/
advance
Progress is shown in the display during
playback.
29m59s
O Do not cover the speaker during playback.
STOP
PAUSE
N • Press MENU/OK to pause playback and display volume controls. Press
the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to adjust the volume; press
MENU/OK again to resume playback. Volume can also be adjusted using D SOUND SET-UP > PLAYBACK VOLUME.
• To view movies on a television connected via HDMI instead of in the
camera monitor, press the a button (P 60).
69
Movie Recording and Playback
Focus stick
(focus lever) Full-frame playback
View photo
Up
information
Down
Start playback
Viewing Movies
Playback Speed
Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to
adjust playback speed during playback. Speed
is shown by the number of arrows (M or N).
Arrows
4
Movie Recording and Playback
70
29m59s
Taking Photographs
71
P, S, A, and M Modes
P, S, A, and M modes give you varying degrees of control
over shutter speed and aperture.
Mode P: Program AE
Let the camera choose shutter speed and aperture for optimal
exposure. Other values that produce the same exposure can be
selected with program shift.
Rotate the mode dial to P.
5
P will appear in the display.
Taking Photographs
O • If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter
speed and aperture displays will show “– – –”.
• Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release the dial.
72
P, S, A, and M Modes
Program Shift
If desired, you can rotate the front command
dial to select other combinations of shutter
speed and aperture without altering exposure
(program shift).
Aperture
Shutter speed
O Program shift is not available in any of the following circumstances:
• When TTL is selected for F FLASH SETTING > FLASH FUNCTION
SETTING
• When an auto option is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING >
DYNAMIC RANGE
• In movie mode
N To cancel program shift, turn the camera off.
5
Taking Photographs
73
Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE
Choose a shutter speed and let the camera adjust aperture for
optimal exposure.
1
Rotate the mode dial to S.
S will appear in the display.
5
Taking Photographs
2
Rotate the front command dial to
choose a shutter speed.
N The roles played by the front command dial can be changed using
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING.
O • If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected shutter
speed, aperture will be displayed in red.
• If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the aperture display will show “– – –”.
• Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release the dial.
74
P, S, A, and M Modes
N • Shutter speed can be adjusted while the AFON button is pressed or
the shutter button is pressed halfway.
• At shutter speeds slower than 1 second, a count-down timer will be
displayed while the exposure is in progress.
• To reduce “noise” (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for
H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that
this may increase the time needed to record images after shooting.
• The picture will go out of focus if the camera is moved during a long
time-exposure; use of a tripod is recommended.
5
Taking Photographs
75
Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE
Choose an aperture and let the camera adjust shutter speed for
optimal exposure.
1
Rotate the mode dial to A.
A will appear in the display.
5
Taking Photographs
2
Rotate the lens aperture ring to choose an aperture.
N • If the lens is not equipped with an aperture ring or if the aperture
ring is in the A position, aperture can be adjusted by rotating the
front command dial.
• The roles played by the front command dial can be changed using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING.
O • If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected aperture,
shutter speed will be displayed in red.
• If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter
speed display will show “– – –”.
• Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release the dial.
N Aperture can be adjusted even while the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
76
P, S, A, and M Modes
Previewing Depth of Field
When PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD is assigned
to a function button, pressing the button displays a L icon and stops aperture down to the
selected setting, allowing depth of field to be
previewed in the display.
5
Taking Photographs
77
Mode M: Manual Exposure
In manual mode, the user controls both shutter speed and aperture. Shots can be deliberately overexposed (brighter) or underexposed (darker), opening the door for a variety of individual creative
expression. The amount the picture would be under- or over-exposed at current settings is shown by the exposure indicator; adjust
shutter speed and aperture until the desired exposure is reached.
1
Rotate the mode dial to M.
M will appear in the display.
5
Taking Photographs
78
P, S, A, and M Modes
2
Rotate the front command dial to
choose a shutter speed and the lens
aperture ring to choose an aperture.
N • The manual exposure display includes an exposure indicator that
shows the amount the picture would be under- or over-exposed at
current settings.
• If the lens is not equipped with an aperture ring or if the aperture
ring is in the A position, aperture can be adjusted by rotating the rear
command dial.
• The roles played by the front and rear command dials can be changed
using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING.
O Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release
the dial.
1
Set shutter speed to BULB.
79
5
Taking Photographs
BULB
Select a shutter speed of BULB for long time-exposures in which
you open and close the shutter manually. Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent the camera moving during the exposure.
2
Press the shutter button all the way down.
• The shutter will remain open for up to 60 minutes while the
shutter button is pressed.
• The display shows the time elapsed since the exposure
started.
• Releasing the shutter button closes the shutter, ending the
exposure. Processing will begin, and the camera will display
the processing time remaining.
O Bulb photography is not available in drive modes other than STILL
IMAGE or when the electronic shutter is selected for A SHOOTING
SETTING > SHUTTER TYPE.
N • Selecting an aperture of A fixes shutter speed at 30 s.
• To reduce “noise” (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for
H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that
this may increase the time needed to record images after shooting.
5
Taking Photographs
80
P, S, A, and M Modes
Using a Remote Release
A remote release can be used for long time-exposures. When using an optional RR-100 remote
release or an electronic release from third-party
suppliers, connect it to the camera’s remote release connector.
Exposure Preview
To preview exposure in the LCD monitor, select PREVIEW EXP./WB for
D SCREEN SET-UP > PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE.
N Select an option other than PREVIEW EXP./WB when using the flash
81
5
Taking Photographs
or on other occasions on which exposure may change when the picture is taken.
FILTER
Take photos with filter effects.
1
Rotate the mode dial to FILTER.
2
Choose a filter via A SHOOTING SETTING > FILTER SETTING.
Filter
G TOY CAMERA
H MINIATURE
I POP COLOR
5
Taking Photographs
J HIGH-KEY
Z LOW-KEY
K DYNAMIC TONE
X SOFT FOCUS
Description
Choose for a retro toy camera effect.
The tops and bottoms of pictures are blurred for
a diorama effect.
Create high-contrast images with saturated
colors.
Create bright, low-contrast images.
Create uniformly dark tones with few areas of
emphasized highlights.
Dynamic tone expression is used for a fantasy
effect.
Create a look that is evenly soft throughout the
whole image.
u PARTIAL COLOR (RED)
v PARTIAL COLOR (ORANGE)
Areas of the image that are the selected color
w PARTIAL COLOR (YELLOW)
are recorded in that color. All other areas of the
x PARTIAL COLOR (GREEN)
image are recorded in black-and-white.
y PARTIAL COLOR (BLUE)
z PARTIAL COLOR (PURPLE)
O Depending on the subject and camera settings, images may in
some cases be grainy or vary in brightness or hue.
82
P, S, A, and M Modes
Custom Modes
Rotate the mode dial to any of modes
C1 (CUSTOM 1) through C7 (CUSTOM 7)
to take pictures using previously-saved
shooting menu settings.
Mode Selection: Still Photography or Movie
Choose whether the selected custom settings bank (C1 through
C7) is for still photography (x STILL) or movie recording
(F MOVIE).
1
Navigate to H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING in the photo menus,
highlight xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING, and press MENU/OK.
N You can also use B MOVIE SETTING > xF CUSTOM MODE
SETTING in the movie menus.
5
Highlight the desired custom settings bank and press MENU/OK.
3
Highlight x STILL or F MOVIE and
press MENU/OK.
The selected custom settings bank
can now be used for still photography or movie recording.
xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING
Taking Photographs
2
xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING
x STILL
F MOVIE
83
Saving Current Settings
Save current settings in a custom settings bank.
1
Navigate to H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING in the photo
menus, highlight x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING, and
press MENU/OK.
N To
save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIE
SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING.
2
Highlight a destination bank for current settings (C1 through C7) and
press MENU/OK.
EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 6
CUSTOM 7
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
EXIT
5
Taking Photographs
3
Highlight SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
and press MENU/OK.
4
Highlight OK and press MENU/OK.
Current settings will be saved to the
selected bank.
CUSTOM 1
SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
EDIT/CHECK
SAVE THE CHANGES
RESET THE CHANGES
COPY
RESET CUSTOM SETTING
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
CUSTOM 1
SAVE THE CHANGES OK?
OK
CANCEL
84
P, S, A, and M Modes
Editing Custom Settings
Edit existing custom settings banks.
1
Navigate to H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING in the photo
menus, highlight x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING, and
press MENU/OK.
N To
save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIE
SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING.
2
Highlight the desired custom settings bank and press MENU/OK.
EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 6
CUSTOM 7
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
EXIT
Highlight EDIT/CHECK and press
MENU/OK.
4
The camera will display a list of shooting menu items; highlight an item
you wish to edit and press MENU/OK.
Adjust the selected item as desired.
CUSTOM 1
SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
EDIT/CHECK
SAVE THE CHANGES
RESET THE CHANGES
COPY
RESET CUSTOM SETTING
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
5
Taking Photographs
3
CUSTOM 1 EDIT/CHECK
SHOOTING MODE
SHUTTER SPEED
APERTURE
EXP. COMPENSATION
DRIVE MODE
EXIT
85
5
Press MENU/OK to save the changes and return to the shooting
menu list.
Adjust additional items as desired.
N If DISABLE is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > AUTO
UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING in the photo menu or for B MOVIE
SETTING > FAUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING in the movie menu, red dots will appear next to the edited items but the
changes will not be saved automatically.
• To save the changes for selected items, highlight the items in the
list and press Q.
• To save changes for all items, return to Step 3 and select SAVE
THE CHANGES. To cancel all changes and restore the previous
settings, select RESET THE CHANGES.
• If you copy an item marked by a red dot, the item will be copied
with the changes intact.
5
Taking Photographs
86
P, S, A, and M Modes
Copying Custom Settings
Copy custom settings from one bank to another, overwriting the
settings in the destination bank. If the source bank has been renamed, the name will also be copied to the destination bank.
1
Navigate to H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING in the photo menus,
highlight x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING, and press MENU/OK.
N To copy settings for a movie custom settings bank, navigate to
B MOVIE SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/
SAVE CUSTOM SETTING.
2
Highlight the source bank and press
MENU/OK.
EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 6
CUSTOM 7
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
EXIT
3
Highlight COPY and press MENU/OK.
CUSTOM 1
5
Taking Photographs
SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
EDIT/CHECK
SAVE THE CHANGES
RESET THE CHANGES
COPY
RESET CUSTOM SETTING
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
87
4
Highlight the destination bank (C1
through C7) and press MENU/OK.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.
COPY TO
CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 6
CUSTOM 7
N Any changes to custom settings in the
destination bank will be overwritten.
5
5
Taking Photographs
88
Highlight OK and press MENU/OK.
The selected settings will be copied
to the destination bank, overwriting
any existing settings.
COPY
CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
COPY OK?
OK
CANCEL
P, S, A, and M Modes
Resetting Custom Settings
Reset selected custom settings banks.
1
Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.
N This assumes that you wish to reset settings for still photography.
To reset movie settings, navigate to B MOVIE SETTING in the
movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING.
2
Highlight the desired custom settings bank and press MENU/OK.
EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 6
CUSTOM 7
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
EXIT
3
Highlight OK and press MENU/OK.
The selected bank will be reset.
CUSTOM 1
SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
EDIT/CHECK
SAVE THE CHANGES
RESET THE CHANGES
COPY
RESET CUSTOM SETTING
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
5
Taking Photographs
4
Highlight RESET CUSTOM SETTING
and press MENU/OK.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.
RESET CUSTOM SETTING
CUSTOM 1
RESET CUSTOM SETTING OK?
RESET ALL SETTINGS TO DEFAULT
OK
CANCEL
89
P, S, A, and M Modes
Renaming Custom Settings Banks
Rename selected custom settings banks.
1
Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.
N This assumes that you wish to rename settings for still photography. To rename movie settings, navigate to B MOVIE SETTING in
the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING.
2
Highlight the desired custom settings bank and press MENU/OK.
EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 6
CUSTOM 7
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
ASSIGNED
EXIT
CUSTOM 1
3
Highlight EDIT CUSTOM NAME and
press MENU/OK.
4
Enter a new name for the custom settings bank and select
SET.
The selected bank will be renamed.
5
Taking Photographs
90
SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
EDIT/CHECK
SAVE THE CHANGES
RESET THE CHANGES
COPY
RESET CUSTOM SETTING
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
Autofocus
Take pictures using autofocus.
1
Select single or continuous AF for G AF/MF SETTING >
FOCUS MODE in the shooting menu (P 92).
2
3
Use G AF/MF SETTING > AF MODE to choose an AF mode
(P 94).
Select G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS
AREA and choose the position and
size of the focus frame (P 96).
4
Take pictures.
5
Taking Photographs
91
Focus Mode
Choose how the camera focuses.
1
2
Press MENU/OK to display the menus.
3
Choose from the following options:
Select G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS MODE in the shooting
menu.
Mode
Description
Focus manually using the lens focus ring. Choose for manp
ual control of focus or in situations in which the camera is
MANUAL FOCUS unable to focus using autofocus (P 100).
Focus is continually adjusted to reflect changes in the disk
tance to the subject while the shutter button is pressed
CONTINUOUS AF halfway. Use for subjects that are in motion.
l
5
SINGLE AF
Focus locks while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
Choose for stationary subjects.
Taking Photographs
N • Regardless of the option selected, manual focus will be used when
the lens is in manual focus mode.
• If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > PRE-AF, focus will be ad-
justed continuously in modes l and k even when the shutter button is not pressed.
92
Autofocus
The Focus Indicator
Focus status is shown by the focus indicator.
Focus indicator
Focus indicator
( )
z
(lights green)
(z)
(lights green)
A
(blinks white)
j
Focus status
Camera focusing.
Subject in focus; focus locked (focus mode l).
Subject in focus (focus mode k). Focus is automatically adjusted for changes in distance to subject.
Camera unable to focus.
Manual focus (focus mode p).
5
Taking Photographs
93
Autofocus Options (AF Mode)
Focus can be adapted to a variety of subjects by changing the
combination of settings selected for focus and AF modes.
1
2
3
Press MENU/OK and go to the shooting menu.
Select G AF/MF SETTING > AF MODE.
Choose an AF mode.
How the camera focuses depends on the focus mode.
Focus Mode l (SINGLE AF)
Option
Description
Sample image
Camera focuses on subject in
selected focus point. Use for pinSINGLE POINT point focus on selected subject.
r
5
Taking Photographs
y
ZONE
z
WIDE
j
ALL
94
Camera focuses on subject in selected focus zone. Focus zones include multiple focus points, making it easier to focus on subjects in
motion.
Camera focuses automatically on
high-contrast subjects; display
shows areas in focus.
Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection display (P 97, 98) to cycle through AF modes in the following
order: r SINGLE POINT, y ZONE, and z WIDE.
Autofocus
Focus Mode k (CONTINUOUS AF)
Option
Description
Sample image
Focus tracks subject at selected focus point. Use for subjects moving
SINGLE POINT toward or away from camera.
r
y
ZONE
z
TRACKING
ALL
Focus tracks subjects moving
through wide area of frame.
5
Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection display (P 97, 98) to cycle through AF modes in the following
order: r SINGLE POINT, y ZONE, and z TRACKING.
95
Taking Photographs
j
Camera tracks focus in selected focus zone. Use for subjects that are
moving fairly predictably.
Focus-Point Selection
Choose a focus point for autofocus.
Viewing the Focus-Point Display
1
2
3
Press MENU/OK and go to the shooting menu.
Select G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS AREA to view the focus-point display.
Use the focus stick (focus lever) and rear command dial to
choose a focus area.
N The focus point can also be selected using touch controls (P 31).
5
Taking Photographs
96
Autofocus
Selecting a Focus Point
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose
the focus point and the rear command
dial to choose the size of the focus frame.
The procedure varies with the option selected for AF mode.
Rear command
dial
Focus stick
DISP/BACK
button
AF mode
Tilt
r
y
Rotate
Choose from 6
frame sizes
Select
Choose from 3
highlighted focus
frame sizes
point
—
Select center
focus point
N • Manual focus-point selection is not available when z WIDE/
TRACKING is selected in focus mode l.
• If j ALL is selected for AF mode, you can rotate the rear command
dial in the focus-point selection display to cycle through AF modes
in the following order: r SINGLE POINT (6 frame sizes), y ZONE
(3 frame sizes), and either z WIDE (focus mode l) or z TRACKING
(focus mode k).
97
5
Taking Photographs
z
Select focus
point
Press
The Focus-Point Display
The focus-point display varies with the option selected for AF
mode.
N Focus frames are shown by small squares (), focus zones by the large
squares.
r SINGLE POINT
5
Taking Photographs
Number of
able can be
G AF/MF
NUMBER
POINTS.
AF mode
y ZONE
z WIDE/TRACKING
points avail- Choose from zones with Position focus frame over
selected using 7 × 7, 5 × 5, or 3 × 3 focus subject you want to track
SETTING > points.
using continuous AF.
OF FOCUS
Autofocus
Although the camera boasts a high-precision autofocus system, it may be
unable to focus on the subjects listed below.
• Very shiny subjects such as mirrors or car bodies.
• Subjects photographed through a window or other reflective object.
• Dark subjects and subjects that absorb rather than reflect light, such as
hair or fur.
• Insubstantial subjects, such as smoke or flame.
• Subjects that show little contrast with the background.
• Subjects positioned in front of or behind a high-contrast object that is
also in the focus frame (for example, a subject photographed against a
backdrop of highly contrasting elements).
98
Autofocus
Checking Focus
To zoom in on the current focus area for precise
focus, press the center of the focus stick (focus
lever). Press up to two times more to zoom in
further and a fourth time to cancel zoom.
Normal display
Focus zoom
99
5
Taking Photographs
N • In focus mode l, zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear command dial.
• In focus mode l, select SINGLE POINT for AF MODE.
• Focus zoom is not available in focus mode k or when G AF/MF
SETTING > PRE-AF is on.
• Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FOCUS LEVER SETTING to
change the function performed by the center of the focus stick (focus
lever). D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING can
also be used to assign focus zoom to other controls.
Manual Focus
Adjust focus manually.
5
1
Select MANUAL FOCUS for G AF/MF
SETTING > FOCUS MODE.
2
Focus manually using the lens focus
ring. Rotate the ring left to reduce
the focus distance, right to increase.
3
Take pictures.
Taking Photographs
N • Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING to
reverse the direction of rotation of the focus ring.
• Regardless of the option selected, manual focus will be used when
the lens is in manual focus mode.
100
Manual Focus
Quick Focus
• To use autofocus to focus on the subject in the selected focus area, press
the button to which focus lock or AF-ON has been assigned (the size of
the focus area can be chosen with the rear command dial).
• In manual focus mode, you can use this feature to quickly focus on a chosen subject using either single or continuous AF according to the option
chosen for G AF/MF SETTING > xF INSTANT AF SETTING.
5
Taking Photographs
101
Checking Focus
A variety of options are available for checking focus in manual
focus mode.
The Manual Focus Indicator
The white line indicates the distance to the subject in the focus area (in meters or feet according to the option selected for
D SCREEN SET-UP > FOCUS SCALE UNITS in the setup menu),
the blue bar the depth of field, or in other words the distance in
front of and behind the subject that appears to be in focus.
Focus distance
(white line)
Depth of field
5
Taking Photographs
N • If both AF DISTANCE INDICATOR and MF DISTANCE INDICATOR
are selected in the D SCREEN SET-UP > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING
list, the manual focus indicator can also be viewed using the depthof-field indicator in the standard display. Use the DISP/BACK button to
display standard indicators.
• Use the G AF/MF SETTING > xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE option
to choose how depth of field is displayed. Choose FILM FORMAT
BASIS to help you make practical assessments of depth of field for
pictures that will be viewed as prints and the like, PIXEL BASIS to
help you assess depth of field for pictures that will be viewed at high
resolutions on computers or other electronic displays.
102
Manual Focus
Focus Zoom
If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS CHECK, the camera will automatically zoom in on the selected focus area when the
focus ring is rotated. Press the center of the focus stick (focus lever)
to exit zoom.
N • Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose another focus area.
• Zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear command dial. Zoom can-
not, however, be adjusted when DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE or DIGITAL
MICROPRISM is selected for MF assist.
MF Assist
Use G AF/MF SETTING > MF ASSIST (P 160) in the photo
menus or G AF/MF SETTING > F MF ASSIST (P 206) in the
movie menus to choose a focus check option.
N The focus check options for movies differ from those for still photography.
5
Taking Photographs
• DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE: Displays a split image
in the center of the frame. Frame the
subject in the split-image area and rotate the focus ring until the four parts
of the split image are correctly aligned.
• DIGITAL MICROPRISM: A grid pattern that
emphasizes blur is displayed when the
subject is out of focus, disappearing to
be replaced by a sharp image when the
subject is in focus.
103
Manual Focus
• FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT: Highlights high-con-
trast outlines. Rotate the focus ring until
the subject is highlighted.
• FOCUS METER: A meter is displayed below
the focus point indicating whether focus is in front of or behind the subject.
The needle swings left when focus is in
front of the subject and right when it is
behind the subject. Adjust focus so the
needle is pointing straight up.
N The display reverses when Y CCW is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL
SETTING > LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING > FOCUS RING ROTATE.
5
Taking Photographs
104
Sensitivity
Adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light.
To view sensitivity settings, press the
ISO button.
Option
AUTO1
AUTO2
AUTO3
125–12800
N Sensitivity is not reset when the camera is turned off.
Adjusting Sensitivity
High values can be used to reduce blur when lighting is poor, while lower
values allow slower shutter speeds or wider apertures in bright light; note,
however, that mottling may appear in pictures taken at high sensitivities.
105
5
Taking Photographs
L (64/80/100)
H (25600/51200)
Description
Sensitivity is automatically adjusted in response to shooting conditions according to combination of standard and
maximum sensitivity and minimum shutter speed chosen for A SHOOTING SETTING > ISO. Choose from
AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3 (P 106).
Adjust sensitivity manually. Selected value is shown in display.
Choose for special situations. Note that mottling may appear in pictures taken at H, while L reduces dynamic range.
Sensitivity
AUTO
Choose the base sensitivity, maximum sensitivity, and minimum
shutter speed for AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3.
Item
DEFAULT SENSITIVITY
MAX. SENSITIVITY
MIN. SHUTTER SPEED
Options
125–12800
400–12800
⁄–¼ SEC, AUTO
AUTO1
800
Default
AUTO2
125
3200
AUTO
AUTO3
12800
The camera automatically chooses a sensitivity between the default and maximum values; sensitivity is only raised above the
default value if the shutter speed required for optimal exposure
would be slower than the value selected for MIN. SHUTTER SPEED.
N • If the value selected for DEFAULT SENSITIVITY is higher than that
5
Taking Photographs
selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY, DEFAULT SENSITIVITY will be set to
the value selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY.
• The camera may select shutter speeds slower than MIN. SHUTTER
SPEED if pictures would still be underexposed at the value selected
for MAX. SENSITIVITY.
• If AUTO is selected for MIN. SHUTTER SPEED, the camera will automatically adjust the minimum shutter speed according to the focal
length of the lens (the setting remains the same whether image stabilization is on or off ).
106
Metering
Choose how the camera meters exposure.
A SHOOTING SETTING > PHOTOMETRY offers a choice of the
following metering options:
O The selected option will only take effect if OFF is selected for g FACE/
EYE DETECTION SETTING and SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING in the
G AF/MF SETTING menu.
Mode
o
MULTI
p
CENTERWEIGHTED
v
w
AVERAGE
The camera meters the entire frame but assigns the greatest
weight to the area at the center.
The camera meters lighting conditions in an area equivalent
to 2% of the frame. Recommended with backlit subjects and
in other cases in which the background is much brighter or
darker than the main subject.
Exposure is set to the average for the entire frame. Provides
consistent exposure across multiple shots with the same lighting, and is particularly effective for landscapes and portraits of
subjects dressed in black or white.
N To meter the subject in the selected focus area, choose ON for G AF/
MF SETTING > INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA (P 161).
107
5
Taking Photographs
SPOT
Description
The camera instantly determines exposure based on an analysis of composition, color, and brightness distribution. Recommended in most situations.
Exposure Compensation
Adjust exposure.
Rotate the rear command dial to adjust
exposure.
N • The command dial used in this role can be chosen using D BUTTON/
DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING.
• In manual mode, exposure can be adjusted by rotating the front or
rear command dial after pressing a control to which d WHEN SET
TO B (ON/OFF SWITCH) is assigned.
5
O • The amount of compensation available varies with the shooting mode.
• Exposure compensation can be previewed in the shooting display,
although the display may not accurately reflect its effects if:
the exposure compensation amount exceeds ±3 EV,
W 200% or X 400% is selected for DYNAMIC RANGE, or
STRONG or WEAK is selected for D RANGE PRIORITY.
Taking Photographs
-
Exposure compensation can still be previewed in the viewfinder or LCD
monitor by pressing the shutter button halfway. In movie mode, the
display may not accurately reflect the effects of exposure compensation during F-log recording or when W 200% or X 400% is selected for F DYNAMIC RANGE. An accurate preview can be obtained by
selecting mode M and adjusting exposure directly.
108
Focus/Exposure Lock
Focus and exposure lock when the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
1
Position the subject in the focus
frame and press the shutter button
halfway to lock focus and exposure.
Focus and exposure will remain
locked while the shutter button is
pressed halfway (AF/AE lock).
2
Press the button all the way down.
N Focus
and exposure lock via the shutter button is only available
when ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > SHUTTER AF,
SHUTTER AE.
5
Taking Photographs
109
Focus/Exposure Lock
Other Controls
Focus and exposure can also be locked
using the AEL and AFON buttons. At default settings, you can use the AEL button
to lock exposure without locking focus.
If the AFON button is assigned AF LOCK
ONLY, it can similarly be used to lock focus without locking exposure.
AEL button
(exposure lock)
• While the assigned control is pressed,
5
pressing the shutter button halfway will
not end the lock.
• If AE&AF ON/OFF SWITCH is selected
for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > AE/
AF-LOCK MODE, the lock can only be
ended by pressing the control a second
time.
AFON button
Taking Photographs
N • The focus lever (focus stick) can be used to reposition the focus point
during exposure lock.
• The AEL and AFON buttons can be assigned other roles using
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING. Exposure
and focus lock can also be assigned to other buttons (P 300).
110
Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)
Capture motion in a series of pictures.
1
Press the DRIVE button to display
drive mode options.
2
If J CH HIGH SPEED BURST or O CL LOW SPEED BURST is
selected, the camera will take pictures continuously while
the shutter-release button is pressed.
Shooting ends when the shutter button is released or the
memory card is full.
all photos shot to that point. Burst shooting may not begin if the
space available on the memory card is insufficient.
• Frame rates may slow as more shots are taken.
• Frame rate varies with the scene, shutter speed, sensitivity, and focus
mode.
• Depending on shooting conditions, frame rates may slow or the flash
may not fire.
• Recording times may increase during burst shooting.
• The choice of burst modes varies with the option selected for
A SHOOTING SETTING > SHUTTER TYPE.
111
5
Taking Photographs
O • If file numbering reaches 9999 before shooting is complete, the remaining pictures will be recorded to a new folder.
• Shooting ends when the memory card is full; the camera will record
Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)
Focus and Exposure
• Select focus mode CONTINUOUS AF to vary focus with shot.
• To vary exposure with each shot, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL
SETTING > SHUTTER AE.
N Depending on such factors as aperture, sensitivity, and exposure compensation, exposure may not be adjusted automatically.
5
Taking Photographs
112
Bracketing
Automatically vary settings over a series of pictures.
1
Press the DRIVE button to display
drive mode options.
2
Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight one
of the following:
Option
W ISO BKT
V WHITE BALANCE BKT
P
114
114
Option
s Bracketing
P
115
Press the focus stick left or right to highlight the desired
bracketing settings.
4
5
Press MENU/OK to select.
Take pictures.
113
5
Taking Photographs
3
W ISO BKT
Select a bracketing amount (±1⁄3, ±2⁄3, or ±1) in the drive mode
display. Each time the shutter is released, the camera will take
a picture at the current sensitivity and process it to create two
additional copies, one with sensitivity raised and the other with
sensitivity lowered by the selected amount.
V WHITE BALANCE BKT
Select a bracketing amount (±1, ±2, or ±3) in the drive mode display. Each time the shutter is released, the camera takes one shot
and processes it to create three copies: one at the current white
balanced setting, one with fine-tuning increased by the selected
amount, and another with fine-tuning decreased by the selected
amount.
5
Taking Photographs
114
Bracketing
s Bracketing
O AE BKT
Use A SHOOTING SETTING > AE BKT SETTING to choose the
bracketing amount, bracketing order, and number of shots. The
camera will take the specified number of shots in sequence: one
using the metered value for exposure and the others over- or under-exposed by multiples of the selected bracketing amount.
N Regardless of the bracketing amount, exposure will not exceed the
limits of the exposure metering system.
X FILM SIMULATION BKT
Each time the shutter is released, the camera takes one shot and
processes it to create copies with different film simulation settings,
chosen using A SHOOTING SETTING > FILM SIMULATION BKT.
N While dynamic range bracketing is in effect, sensitivity will be restricted
to a minimum of ISO 500; the sensitivity previously in effect is restored
when bracketing ends.
115
5
Taking Photographs
Y DYNAMIC RANGE BKT
Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes three
shots with different dynamic ranges: 100% for the first, 200% for
the second, and 400% for the third.
Z FOCUS BKT
Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes a series of photos, varying focus with each shot. The A SHOOTING
SETTING > FOCUS BKT SETTING item offers a choice of MANUAL
and AUTO bracketing.
N • Do not adjust zoom during shooting.
• Use of a tripod is recommended.
MANUAL
In MANUAL mode, you choose the following.
Option
FRAMES
STEP
INTERVAL
5
Description
Choose the number of shots.
Choose the amount focus changes with each shot.
Choose the interval between shots.
Taking Photographs
Focus and FRAMES/STEP
The relation between focus and the options chosen for FRAMES and STEP
is shown in the illustration.
Step
Frames
1
2
3
4
5
Starting focus position
• Focus proceeds from the starting position toward infinity.
• Small STEP values translate to small changes in focus, larger values to larger
changes.
• Regardless of the option chosen for FRAMES, shooting ends when focus reaches infinity.
116
Bracketing
AUTO
In AUTO mode, the camera calculates FRAMES and STEP automatically.
1
Select A SHOOTING SETTING in the shooting menu, highlight FOCUS BKT SETTING, and press MENU/OK.
2
Select AUTO and choose an INTERVAL.
The view through the lens will be displayed.
3
Focus on the nearest end of the subject and press MENU/OK.
The selected focus distance appears
as A on the focus distance indicator.
FOCUS BKT SETTING
SET POINT A
CONTROL THE FOCUS RING
SET POINT B
SET
N The same focus range can be chosen by focusing on the farthest
end of the subject first.
5
FOCUS BKT SETTING
SET POINT B
CONTROL THE FOCUS RING
SET POINT A
SET
N Instead of pressing the DISP/BACK button, you can press MENU/OK
and select A again.
5
Take photographs.
The camera will calculate values for
FRAMES and STEP automatically. The
number of frames will appear in the
display.
NO
117
Taking Photographs
4
Focus on the farthest end of the subject and press DISP/BACK.
The selected focus distance (B) and
focus range (A to B) appear on the
focus distance indicator.
HDR
Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes
three shots, varying exposure each time, and combines
them into a single picture. The resulting photograph preserves details in highlights and shadows.
1
Press the DRIVE button to display
drive mode options and select HDR.
2
Choose the amount the brightnesses of the exposures vary.
Option
HDR AUTO
5
Taking Photographs
HDR200
HDR400
HDR800
HDR800+
3
Description
Dynamic range is automatically set to a value of from 200%
to 800%.
Dynamic range is set to 200%.
Dynamic range is set to 400%.
Dynamic range is set to 800%.
Camera settings are adjusted for maximum variation in dynamic range.
Take photographs.
The camera will create a combined image.
118
HDR
O • Keep the camera steady.
• The desired results may not be achieved in the subject moves or the
composition or lighting changes during shooting.
• The picture will be cropped a very small amount and the resolution
will drop slightly.
• Mottling may appear in pictures taken at higher values. Choose a value according to the scene.
• “Extended” sensitivity values are not supported.
• Depending on the options selected for HDR and sensitivity, pictures
may not be taken at the selected shutter speed.
• The flash does not fire.
N HDR images are indicated by a t icon during playback.
5
Taking Photographs
119
Panoramas
Follow an on-screen guide to create a panorama.
5
Taking Photographs
1
Press the DRIVE button to display
drive mode options and select
PANORAMA.
2
To select the size of the angle through which you will pan the
camera while shooting, press the focus stick (focus lever) left.
Highlight a size and press MENU/OK.
3
Press the focus stick right to view a choice of pan directions.
Highlight a pan direction and press MENU/OK.
4
Press the shutter button all the way down to start recording.
There is no need to keep the shutter button pressed during
recording.
5
Pan the camera in the direction
shown by the arrow. Shooting ends
automatically when the camera is
panned to the end of the guides and
the panorama is complete.
120
Sweep camera along yellow
line in direction of
ANGLE
DIRECTION
Panoramas
For Best Results
• Move the camera slowly in a small circle at a steady speed
• Keep the camera parallel or at right angles to the horizon and be sure to
pan only in the direction shown by the guides
• Try panning at a different speed if the desired results are not achieved
• Prop your elbows against your sides
• Use a tripod
• For best results, use a lens with a focal length of 35 mm or less (50 mm or
less in 35 mm format).
O • If the shutter button is pressed all the way down before the panorama
is complete, shooting will end and no panorama may be recorded.
• The last part of the panorama may not be recorded if shooting ends
before the panorama is complete.
• Panoramas are created from multiple frames, and the camera may in
some cases be unable to stitch the frames together perfectly.
• Panoramas may be blurred if the subject is poorly lit.
• Shooting may be interrupted if the camera is panned too quickly or
• If ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > SHUTTER AE, exposure for the entire panorama is determined by the first frame.
121
5
Taking Photographs
too slowly. Panning the camera in a direction other than that shown
cancels shooting.
• The camera may in some cases record a greater or lesser angle than
selected.
• The desired results may not be achieved with:
- Moving subjects
- Subjects close to the camera
- Unvarying subjects such as the sky or a field of grass
- Subjects that are in constant motion, such as waves and waterfalls
- Subjects that undergo marked changes in brightness
Panoramas
Viewing Panoramas
With the panorama displayed full frame, press the focus stick (focus lever)
down to start panorama playback. Vertical panoramas will scroll vertically,
horizontal panoramas horizontally.
PLAY
STOP
PAUSE
• In full-frame playback, you can use the rear command dial to zoom panoramas in or out.
• Panorama playback is controlled using the focus stick.
5
Full-frame
playback
—
Start playback
Left/right
View other pictures
Taking Photographs
Focus stick
(focus lever)
Up
Down
122
Panorama
Panorama
playback
playback paused
End playback
Pause playback
Resume playback
Choose pan
Scroll panorama
direction
manually
Multiple Exposures
Create a photograph that combines multiple exposures.
1
Press the DRIVE button to display
the drive mode options and select
MULTIPLE EXPOSURE.
2
Choose a blend mode.
ADDITIVE
AVERAGE
BRIGHT
DARK
3
5
Description
The camera adds the exposures together. You may need to
lower exposure compensation depending on the number
of shots.
The camera automatically optimizes exposure for the final
picture. The background in series shot without changing
the composition will be optimally exposed.
The camera compares the exposures and chooses only the
brightest pixel at each location. Colors may be mixed depending on their brightness and hue.
The camera compares the exposures and chooses only the
darkest pixel at each location. Colors may be mixed depending on their brightness and hue.
Take the first shot.
123
Taking Photographs
Option
Multiple Exposures
4
Press MENU/OK. The first shot will be
shown superimposed on the view
through the lens and you will be
prompted to take the second shot.
NEXT
RETRY
EXIT
N • To return to the previous step and retake the first shot, press the
focus stick (focus lever) left.
• To save the first shot and exit without creating a multiple exposure, press DISP/BACK.
5
Take the second shot, using the first
frame as a guide.
EXIT
5
6
Taking Photographs
Press MENU/OK.
The combined exposures will be displayed as a guide to composing the
next shot.
RETRY
EXIT
N • To return to the previous step and retake the second shot, press
the focus stick left.
• To end shooting and create a multiple exposure from the shots
taken to this point, press DISP/BACK.
7
Make additional exposures.
Each photograph can contain up to nine exposures.
8
Press DISP/BACK to end shooting.
The camera will create the combined image and multiple exposure shooting will end.
124
Pixel-Shift Multi-Shot
The camera takes a series of 20 shots, using in-body image
stabilization to move the image sensor by half a pixel with
each shot and recording each frame in RAW format. Using
specialized computer software, the frames can then be
combined to create a high-resolution RAW picture.
Press the DRIVE button to display
the drive mode options and select
PIXEL SHIFT MULTI SHOT.
2
Choose a value for INTERVAL.
• We recommend setting INTERVAL to SHORTEST.
• If you intend to use the flash with every shot, choose a value for INTERVAL long enough to allow the flash to charge
between shots.
3
Press the shutter button to start shooting.
• The shots are recorded to the memory card in RAW format.
• To minimize vibration, use the self-timer or a remote release.
4
Combine the shots on a computer.
• The shots can be combined using FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner.
• To save high-resolution RAW pictures in other formats, use
Capture One Express for Fujifilm, Capture One for Fujifilm,
or Capture One Pro, available from Capture One A/S. FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO and RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered
by SILKYPIX cannot be used for this purpose.
125
5
Taking Photographs
1
Pixel-Shift Multi-Shot
N • Visit the websites below to learn more about or download the following computer software:
-
FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner:
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/pixel-shift-combiner/
Capture One Express for Fujifilm:
https://www.captureone.com/products-plans/capture-one-express/fujifilm
Capture One for Fujifilm:
https://www.captureone.com/explore-features/fujifilm
Capture One Pro:
https://www.captureone.com/explore-features
• Pixel-shift multi-shot photography can be performed via tethered
shooting. For this purpose, use FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner.
• The flash will synchronize with the shutter at shutter speeds of ½5 s
or slower.
• The following limitations apply to the use of the pixel-shift multi-shot
option:
-
5
Taking Photographs
-
Pixel-shift multi-shot photography can only be performed using the electronic shutter.
Sensitivity is restricted to a maximum of ISO 1600. Choosing higher values
or a setting of AUTO results in a sensitivity of ISO 1600, while lower values
remain unchanged.
The only option available for RAW RECORDING is LOSSLESS COMPRESSED.
Pictures taken with CONTINUOUS AF selected for focus mode will be
shot using SINGLE AF. Pictures taken with SINGLE AF or MANUAL
FOCUS selected are shot in the chosen focus mode.
If the subject or camera moves during shooting, the desired results may
not be achieved when the shots are combined.
A SHOOTING SETTING > FLICKER REDUCTION is automatically set to OFF.
The value selected for exposure compensation applies to all 20 shots.
Playback
Pictures taken using the pixel-shift multi-shot
option are indicated by a pixel-shift multi-shot
icon in full-frame playback (P 216).
126
The Shooting Menus
127
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust image quality settings for still photography.
To display image quality settings, press
MENU/OK in the photo shooting display and
select the H (IMAGE QUALITY SETTING)
tab.
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
FILM SIMULATION
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
EXIT
N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
IMAGE SIZE
Choose the size and aspect ratio at which still pictures are recorded.
6
The Shooting Menus
Option
O3:2
O 16 : 9
O1:1
Image size
7728 × 5152
7728 × 4344
5152 × 5152
Option
O4:3
O5:4
Image size
6864 × 5152
6432 × 5152
Option
P3:2
P 16 : 9
P1:1
Image size
5472 × 3648
5472 × 3080
3648 × 3648
Option
P4:3
P5:4
Image size
4864 × 3648
4560 × 3648
Option
Q3:2
Q 16 : 9
Q1:1
Image size
3888 × 2592
3888 × 2184
2592 × 2592
Option
Q4:3
Q5:4
Image size
3456 × 2592
3264 × 2592
The following options are available in SPORTS FINDER MODE
and when 1.29X CROP is selected in burst mode:
Option
P3:2
P 16 : 9
P1:1
Image size
6000 × 4000
6000 × 3376
4000 × 4000
Option
P4:3
P5:4
Image size
5328 × 4000
4992 × 4000
N IMAGE SIZE is not reset when the camera is turned off or another
shooting mode is selected.
128
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
IMAGE QUALITY
Choose a file format and compression ratio.
Option
FINE
Description
Low compression ratios are used for higher-quality images.
Higher compression ratios are used to increase the number of
NORMAL
images that can be stored.
FINE + RAW
Record both RAW and fine-quality JPEG or HEIF images.
NORMAL + RAW Record both RAW and normal-quality JPEG or HEIF images.
RAW
Record RAW images only.
The Function Buttons
To toggle RAW image quality on or off for a single shot, assign RAW to a
function button (P 297). Press the button once to select the option in
the right column, again to return to the original setting (left column).
Option selected by pressing function
button to which RAW is assigned
FINE + RAW
NORMAL + RAW
FINE
NORMAL
FINE
129
6
The Shooting Menus
Option currently selected for
IMAGE QUALITY
FINE
NORMAL
FINE + RAW
NORMAL + RAW
RAW
RAW RECORDING
Choose whether to compress RAW images.
Option
UNCOMPRESSED
Description
RAW images are not compressed.
RAW images are compressed using a reversible algorithm
that reduces file size with no loss of image data. The images can be viewed in Capture One Express for Fujifilm 1,
Capture One for Fujifilm 1, Capture One 1, RAW FILE
LOSSLESS COMPRESSED CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX 2, FUJIFILM X RAW
STUDIO, or other software that supports “lossless” RAW
compression. Quality is the same as UNCOMPRESSED,
but the resulting files are anywhere from about 30 to 90
percent of their uncompressed size.
RAW images are compressed using a “lossy”, non-reversible
algorithm. Quality is about the same as UNCOMPRESSED,
COMPRESSED
but the resulting files are anywhere from about 25 to 35 percent of their uncompressed size.
6
The Shooting Menus
1 For information on when support will be available, visit:
https://www.captureone.com/
2 For information on when support will be available, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/software/raw-file-converter-ex-poweredby-silkypix/
130
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
Choose whether pictures are recorded in JPEG or HEIF.
Option
JPEG
HEIF
Description
Pictures are recorded in the widely-supported JPEG format.
Pictures are recorded in HEIF, a format with excellent compression but limited options for viewing and sharing.
O • JPEG is automatically selected in place of HEIF during filter-effect,
panorama, multiple-exposure, and HDR photography.
• Selecting HEIF disables CLARITY and sets COLOR SPACE to sRGB.
• HEIF pictures are stored on the memory card as files with the exten-
sion “.HIF”. Before the pictures can be viewed on a computer, the extension must be changed to “.HEIC”. This occurs automatically when
HEIF pictures are uploaded from the camera to a computer via USB.
6
The Shooting Menus
131
FILM SIMULATION
Simulate the effects of different kinds of film, including blackand-white (with or without color filters). Choose a palette according to your subject and creative intent.
Option
6
Description
The Shooting Menus
c PROVIA/STANDARD
Ideal for a wide range of subjects.
d Velvia/VIVID
Vibrant reproduction, ideal for landscape and nature.
e ASTIA/SOFT
Softer color and contrast for a more subdued look.
i CLASSIC CHROME
Soft color and enhanced shadow contrast for a calm look.
g PRO Neg. Hi
Ideal for portrait with slightly enhanced contrast.
h PRO Neg. Std
Ideal for portrait with soft gradations and skin tones.
g CLASSIC Neg.
Enhanced color with hard tonality to increase image
depth.
Amber tinted highlights and rich shadow tone for printed
photo look.
Soft color and rich shadow tone suitable for film look
movie.
Unique color with low saturation and high contrast. Suitable for still and movie.
Shoot in Black and White In rich details with sharpness.
Available with yellow (Ye), red (R), and green (G) filters,
which deepen shades of gray corresponding to hues
complementary to the selected color.
• d ACROS+Ye FILTER: Slightly enhances contrast and
darkens skies.
• c ACROS+R FILTER: Enhances contrast and darkens skies
considerably.
• b ACROS+G FILTER: Produces pleasing skin tones in portrait.
n NOSTALGIC Neg.
X ETERNA/CINEMA
N ETERNA BLEACH
BYPASS
a ACROS
132
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
Option
b MONOCHROME
f SEPIA
Description
Shoots in black and white. Available with yellow (Ye), red
(R), and green (G) filters, which deepen shades of gray corresponding to hues complementary to the selected color.
• e MONOCHROME+Ye FILTER: Slightly enhances contrast
and darkens skies.
• d MONOCHROME+R FILTER: Enhances contrast and darkens skies considerably.
• f MONOCHROME+G FILTER: Produces pleasing skin tones
in portrait.
Shoots in sepia tone.
N • Film simulation options can be combined with tone and sharpness
settings.
• Film simulation settings can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 288).
• For more information, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/global/tag/the-world-of-film-simulation/?post_type=xstories
6
The Shooting Menus
133
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
Add a reddish or bluish tinge (warm or
cool color cast) to the a ACROS and
b MONOCHROME monochrome film
simulations. Color can be adjusted on the
WARM–COOL and G (Green)–M (Magenta)
axes.
GRAIN EFFECT
Add a film grain effect.
ROUGHNESS
Option
STRONG
WEAK
OFF
6
Description
Choose for rougher grains.
Choose for smoother grains.
Turn the effect off.
SIZE
The Shooting Menus
Option
LARGE
SMALL
134
Description
Choose for coarser grains.
Choose for finer grains.
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
SET
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
Increase the range of tones available for rendering colors that
tend to be highly saturated, such as reds, yellows, and greens.
Option
STRONG
WEAK
OFF
Description
Choose for a strong effect.
Choose for a weak effect.
Turn the effect off.
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
Increase the range of tones available for rendering blues.
Option
STRONG
WEAK
OFF
Description
Choose for a strong effect.
Choose for a weak effect.
Turn the effect off.
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT
Smooth complexions.
6
Description
The Shooting Menus
Option
STRONG
WEAK
OFF
Choose for a strong effect.
Choose for a weak effect.
Turn the effect off.
135
WHITE BALANCE
For natural colors, choose a white balance option that matches
the light source.
6
The Shooting Menus
Option
WA WHITE
PRIORITY
AUTO
AA AMBIENCE
PRIORITY
k CUSTOM 1
l CUSTOM 2
m CUSTOM 3
k COLOR
TEMPERATURE
i DAYLIGHT
j SHADE
k FLUORESCENT
LIGHT-1
l FLUORESCENT
LIGHT-2
m FLUORESCENT
LIGHT-3
n INCANDESCENT
Description
White balance is adjusted automatically. Choose for whiter
whites in scenes lit by incandescent bulbs.
White balance is adjusted automatically.
White balance is adjusted automatically. Choose for warmer
whites in scenes lit by incandescent bulbs.
Measure a value for white balance.
Choose a color temperature.
For subjects in direct sunlight.
For subjects in the shade.
Use under “daylight” fluorescent lights.
Use under “warm white” fluorescent lights.
Use under “cool white” fluorescent lights.
Use under incandescent lighting.
Reduces the blue cast typically associated with underwater
g UNDERWATER
lighting.
N • In conditions in which AUTO fails to produce the desired results—for
example, under certain types of lighting or in close-ups of portrait
subjects—use custom white balance or choose a white balance option suited to the light source.
• White balance is adjusted for flash lighting only in AUTO, WA WHITE
PRIORITY, AA AMBIENCE PRIORITY, and g modes. Turn the
flash off using other white balance options.
• White balance options can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 288).
136
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
Fine-Tuning White Balance
Pressing MENU/OK after selecting a white
balance option displays a fine-tuning
dialog; use the focus stick (focus lever) to
fine-tune white balance.
WB SHIFT
SET
N • To exit without fine-tuning white balance, press DISP/BACK after selecting a white balance option.
• You cannot tilt the focus stick diagonally when fine-tuning white balance.
6
The Shooting Menus
137
6
Custom White Balance
Choose k, l, or m to adjust white
CUSTOM 1
balance for unusual lighting conditions
using a white object as a reference (colored objects can also be used to lend
photos a color cast). A white balance tarSHUTTER : NEW WB
SHIFT
NOT CHANGE
get will be displayed; position and size
the target so that it is filled by the reference object and press the
shutter button all the way down to measure white balance (to
select the most recent custom value and exit without measuring
white balance, press DISP/BACK, or press MENU/OK to select the most
recent value and display the fine-tuning dialog).
• If “COMPLETED !” is displayed, press MENU/OK
COMPLETED !
to set white balance to the measured
value.
• If “UNDER” is displayed, raise exposure
compensation and try again.
SET
CANCEL
• If “OVER” is displayed, lower exposure compensation and try again.
The Shooting Menus
k: Color Temperature
Adjust white balance to match the color temperature of the light
source.
N Color temperature can be adjusted to make pictures “warmer” or “colder” or deliberately produce colors that differ radically from those in real
life.
138
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
1
Select k in the white balance menu.
The option currently selected for color temperature will be displayed.
WHITE BALANCE
COLOR TEMPERATURE
R:0 B:0
SET
2
Edit the color temperature using the
focus stick (focus lever) and press
MENU/OK.
A fine-tuning dialog will be displayed.
SHIFT
COLOR TEMPERATURE
SET
SHIFT
N • You can also adjust color temperature in increments of 10 K by
rotating the rear command dial.
• Choose from values of from 2500 to 10000 K.
• To exit without fine-tuning white balance, press DISP/BACK after
choosing a color temperature.
Highlight a fine-tuning amount using the focus stick.
Press MENU/OK.
The changes will be applied. The selected color temperature will appear
in the display.
6
Color Temperature
Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, expressed in Kelvin (K). Light sources with a color temperature close to that of
direct sunlight appear white; light sources with a lower color temperature
have a yellow or red cast, while those with a higher color temperature are
tinged with blue.
139
The Shooting Menus
3
4
DYNAMIC RANGE
Adjust dynamic range. Wide dynamic ranges reduce loss of detail in highlights for more natural results with high-contrast or
backlit scenes.
Option
Description
V 100% Choose for increased contrast.
AUTO
W 200%
Reduce loss of detail in highlights.
X 400%
O Mottling may appear in pictures taken at higher values. Choose a value
according to the scene.
N • If AUTO is selected, the camera will automatically choose either
V 100% or W 200% according to the subject and shooting conditions. Shutter speed and aperture will be displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
• W 200% is available at sensitivities of from ISO 250 to ISO 12800,
X 400% at sensitivities of from ISO 500 to 12800.
6
The Shooting Menus
D RANGE PRIORITY
Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows for natural-looking results when photographing high-contrast scenes.
Option
AUTO
STRONG
WEAK
OFF
Description
Contrast is adjusted automatically in response to lighting conditions.
Adjust dynamic range by a large amount for very high-contrast
scenes.
Adjust dynamic range by a smaller amount for moderately
high-contrast scenes.
Contrast reduction off.
N • WEAK is available at sensitivities of from ISO 250 to ISO 12800,
STRONG at sensitivities of from ISO 500 to 12800.
• When an option other than OFF is selected, TONE CURVE, and
DYNAMIC RANGE will be adjusted automatically; if you wish to adjust these settings manually, choose OFF.
140
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
TONE CURVE
With reference to a tone curve, adjust the
appearance of highlights or shadows,
making them harsher or softer. Choose
higher values to make shadows and
highlights harsher, lower values to make
them softer.
Option
HIGHLIGHTS
SHADOWS
TONE CURVE
HIGHLIGHTS
SHADOWS
SET
CANCEL
Description
-2 to +4
-2 to +4
COLOR
Adjust color density.
−4
−3
−2
−1
Options
0
+1
+2
+3
+4
SHARPNESS
Sharpen or soften outlines.
−3
−2
−1
Options
0
+1
+2
+3
+4
141
The Shooting Menus
−4
6
HIGH ISO NR
Reduce noise in pictures taken at high sensitivities. Choose higher values to reduce noise and smooth outlines, lower values to
leave outlines visible.
−4
−3
−2
−1
Options
0
+1
+2
+3
+4
CLARITY
Increase definition while altering tones in highlights and shadows as little as possible. Choose higher values for increased definition, lower values for a softer effect.
−5
−4
−3
−2
−1
Options
0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
O The additional processing required at settings other than 0 increases
the time need to save each shot.
6
LONG EXPOSURE NR
Select ON to reduce mottling in long time-exposures.
The Shooting Menus
Options
ON
OFF
O The additional processing required when ON is selected increases save
times.
142
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER
Select ON to improve definition by adjusting for diffraction and
the slight loss of focus at the periphery of the lens.
Options
ON
OFF
COLOR SPACE
Choose the gamut of colors available for color reproduction.
Option
sRGB
Adobe RGB
Description
Recommended in most situations.
For commercial printing.
PIXEL MAPPING
Use this option if you notice bright spots in your pictures.
Press MENU/OK in the shooting display and select the H IMAGE
QUALITY SETTING tab.
2
Highlight PIXEL MAPPING and press MENU/OK to perform pixel mapping.
O • Results are not guaranteed.
• Be sure the battery is fully charged before beginning pixel mapping.
• Pixel mapping is not available when the camera temperature is elevated.
• Processing may take a few seconds.
143
6
The Shooting Menus
1
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
Save custom camera settings for commonly-encountered situations. Saved settings can be recalled by rotating the mode dial to
positions C1 (CUSTOM 1) through C7 (CUSTOM 7) (P 83).
AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING
Choose whether changes to saved custom settings apply automatically.
Option
ENABLE
DISABLE
Description
Changes to custom settings banks CUSTOM 1 through
CUSTOM 7 apply automatically.
Changes do not apply automatically. Any changes to custom
settings must be applied manually (P 85).
xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING
Choose whether the current custom settings bank is to be used
for still photography or movie recording (P 83).
6
The Shooting Menus
144
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING
Adjust settings for lenses attached via a mount adapter. The
camera can store settings for multiple lenses (LENS 1 through
LENS 6).
N • DISTORTION CORRECTION, COLOR SHADING CORRECTION, and
PERIPHERAL ILLUMINATION CORRECTION are available with lenses connected via an M mount adapter.
• Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode
(P 202).
FOCAL LENGTH SETTING
Enter the lens’s true focal length.
LENS 5
INPUT FOCAL LENGTH
SET
6
LENS5 DISTORTION CORRECTION
BARREL STRONG
BARREL MEDIUM
BARREL WEAK
OFF
PINCUSHION WEAK
PINCUSHION MEDIUM
PINCUSHION STRONG
The Shooting Menus
DISTORTION CORRECTION
Choose from STRONG, MEDIUM, or
WEAK options to correct BARREL or
PINCUSHION distortion.
CANCEL
145
COLOR SHADING CORRECTION
Color (shading) variations between the
center and edges of the frame can be adjusted separately for each corner.
To use color shading correction, follow the
steps below.
NEXT
SET
1
Rotate the rear command dial to choose a corner. The selected corner is indicated by a triangle.
2
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to adjust shading until there is
no visible difference in color between the selected corner and
the center of the image.
• Press the focus stick left or right to adjust colors on the
cyan–red axis.
• Press the focus stick up or down to adjust colors on the
blue–yellow axis.
N To determine the amount required, adjust color shading correction
6
while taking photos of blue sky or a sheet of gray paper.
The Shooting Menus
146
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
PERIPHERAL ILLUMINATION CORRECTION
Choose from values between –5 and
+5. Choosing positive values increases
peripheral illumination, while choosing
negative values reduces peripheral illumination. Positive values are recomSET
CANCEL
mended for vintage lenses, negative values to create the effect of images taken with an antique lens or a
pinhole camera.
N To determine the amount required, adjust peripheral illumination correction while taking photos of blue sky or a sheet of gray paper.
EDIT LENS NAME
Change the lens name.
6
The Shooting Menus
147
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust focus settings for still photography.
To display AF/MF settings, press MENU/OK
in the photo shooting display and select
the G (AF/MF SETTING) tab.
AF/MF SETTING
FOCUS AREA
FOCUS MODE
AF MODE
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION
AF POINT DISPLAY
NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS
PRE-AF
EXIT
N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
FOCUS AREA
Choose the focus area for autofocus, manual focus, and focus
zoom (P 96).
FOCUS MODE
Choose how the camera focuses (P 92).
6
AF MODE
Choose how the camera focuses in modes l and k (P 94).
The Shooting Menus
148
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
Select focus-tracking options for
CONTINUOUS AF focus mode. Choose
from Sets 1 (SET 1) through 5 (SET 5) according to your subject or select SET 6
CUSTOM for custom focus-tracking options.
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
SET 1 MULTI PURPOSE
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY
ZONE AREA SWITCHING
AUTO
OK
Option
149
6
The Shooting Menus
Description
A standard tracking option that works well with
SET 1 MULTI PURPOSE
the typical range of moving subjects.
The focus system attempts to track the chosen
SET 2 IGNORE OBSTACLES & subject. Choose with subjects that are hard to
CONTINUE TO TRACK SUBJECT keep in the focus area or if other objects are likely
to enter the focus area with the subject.
The focus system attempts to compensate for
SET 3 FOR ACCELERATING/
subject acceleration or deceleration. Choose for
DECELERATING SUBJECT
subjects prone to rapid changes in velocity.
The focus system attempts to focus quickly on
SET 4 FOR SUDDENLY APPEARING subjects entering the focus area. Choose for subSUBJECT
jects that appear abruptly or when rapidly switching subjects.
Choose for hard-to-track subjects prone not only
SET 5 FOR ERRATICALLY MOVING
to sudden changes in velocity but also to large
& ACCEL./DECEL. SUBJECT
movements front to back and left to right.
Adjust TRACKING SENSITIVITY, SPEED
TRACKING SENSITIVITY, and ZONE AREA
SET 6 CUSTOM
SWITCHING to suit your preferences based on
the values for Sets 1–5 (P 150, 152).
Focus Tracking Options
The individual parameters that are part of a focus tracking set are
described below.
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
This parameter determines how long the
camera waits to switch focus when an
object enters the focus area behind or in
front of the current subject. The higher
the value, the longer the camera will wait.
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
QUICK
LOCKED ON
SETS THE TRACKING
SENSITIVITY ON THE SUBJECT
ADJUST
0
1
Options
2
3
SWITCH
4
O • The higher the value, the longer it takes the camera to refocus when
you attempt to switch subjects.
• The lower the value, the more likely the camera is to switch focus
from your subject to other objects in the focus area.
6
The Shooting Menus
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY
This parameter determines how sensitive the tracking system is to changes in
subject velocity. The higher the value,
the greater the precision with which the
system attempts to respond to sudden
movement.
0
Options
1
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY
STEADY
ACCEL./DECEL.
SETS THE SPEED TRACKING
SENSITIVITY FOR MOVING SUBJECT
ADJUST
SWITCH
2
O The higher the value, the more difficulty the camera will have focusing
in situations in which autofocus does not perform well, such as when
the subject is highly reflective or low in contrast.
150
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
ZONE AREA SWITCHING
This parameter determines the focus
area given priority in zone AF.
ZONE AREA SWITCHING
CENTER AUTO
FRONT
SETS THE SWITCHING SENSITIVITY
OF FOCUS FRAME IN ZONE AREA
ADJUST
Option
FRONT
AUTO
CENTER
SWITCH
Description
Zone AF assigns priority to the subjects closest to the camera.
The camera locks focus on the subject at the center of the zone
and then switches focus areas as necessary to track it.
Zone AF assigns priority to subjects in the center of the zone.
O This option takes effect only when y ZONE is selected for AF mode.
Set Values
Parameter values for the different sets are listed below.
SPEED TRACKING
SENSITIVITY
0
0
2
1
2
ZONE AREA
SWITCHING
AUTO
CENTER
AUTO
FRONT
AUTO
151
6
The Shooting Menus
SET 1
SET 2
SET 3
SET 4
SET 5
TRACKING
SENSITIVITY
2
3
2
0
3
Custom Focus Tracking Options
Follow the steps below to adjust settings for Set 6.
1
Select AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS >
SET 6 CUSTOM.
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
SET 6 CUSTOM
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY
ZONE AREA SWITCHING
ADJUST
AUTO
SET DETAIL
RESET
2
Highlight items using the focus stick (focus lever) and rotate
the front command dial to change. To reset settings to their
original values, press b.
3
Press DISP/BACK when settings are complete.
6
The Shooting Menus
152
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION
Choose whether the AF mode used when the camera is in portrait orientation is stored separately from that used when the
camera is in landscape orientation.
Option
Description
OFF
The same settings are used in both orientations.
FOCUS AREA ONLY The focus area for each orientation can be selected separately.
ON
The focus mode and focus area can be selected separately.
AF POINT DISPLAY yz
Choose whether individual focus frames are displayed when
ZONE or WIDE/TRACKING is selected for G AF/MF SETTING >
AF MODE.
Options
ON
OFF
Option
Description
Choose from 117 focus points arranged in a 9- by 13-point
117 POINTS (9 × 13)
grid.
Choose from 425 focus points arranged in a 17- by 25-point
425 POINTS (17 × 25)
grid.
153
6
The Shooting Menus
NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS
Choose the number of focus points available for focus-point selection in manual focus mode or when SINGLE POINT is selected
for AF MODE.
PRE-AF
If ON is selected, the camera will continue to adjust focus even
when the shutter button is not pressed halfway. The camera
adjusts focus continuously, allowing it to focus faster when the
shutter button is pressed halfway. Choosing this option helps
prevent missed shots.
Options
ON
OFF
O Choosing ON increases the drain on the battery.
xF AF ILLUMINATOR
If ON is selected, the AF-assist illuminator will light to assist
autofocus.
Options
ON
6
OFF
The Shooting Menus
O • The camera may be unable to focus using the AF-assist illuminator
in some cases.
• If the camera is unable to focus, try increasing the distance to the
subject.
• Avoid shining the AF-assist illuminator directly into your subject’s
eyes.
N Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 205).
154
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
If the camera detects human faces, it will
assign them priority over the background
and adjust settings appropriately for portraits when setting focus and exposure.
You can also choose whether the camera
focuses on the left or right eye when face
detection is on.
Option
O • If the subject moves as the shutter button is pressed, the face may
not be in the area indicated by the green border when the picture
is taken.
• In some modes, the camera may set exposure for the frame as a
whole rather than the portrait subject.
• Enabling Intelligent Face Detection via FACE DETECTION ON automatically selects OFF for SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING.
155
6
The Shooting Menus
Description
Adjust settings for Intelligent Face Detection. You can also adjust
eye detection settings.
• g EYE OFF: Intelligent Face Detection only.
• u EYE AUTO: The camera automatically chooses which eye
to focus on when a face is detected.
FACE DETECTION
w RIGHT EYE PRIORITY: The camera focuses preferential•
ON
ly on the right eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face
Detection.
• v LEFT EYE PRIORITY: The camera focuses preferentially on the left eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face
Detection.
OFF
Intelligent Face Detection and eye priority off.
N • A single face detected in or near the focus area will be marked with
a white frame.
• If multiple faces are detected in the focus area, the camera will select
one automatically.
• You can choose a different subject by tapping the display to repo-
6
The Shooting Menus
sition the focus area. The focus stick (focus lever) can also be used if
z WIDE is selected for AF MODE.
• When DIRECT AF POINT SELECTION or EDIT FOCUS AREA is chosen for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FOCUS LEVER SETTING >
TILT o, you can also switch subjects using the focus stick (focus lever)
or (during viewfinder photography) touch controls (P 31).
• When the camera is focused on an eye, you can switch from one
eye to the other using a function button to which RIGHT/LEFT EYE
SWITCH has been assigned.
• If the selected subject leaves the frame, the camera will wait a set
time for its return and consequently the white frame may sometimes
appear in locations where no face is seen.
• Depending on shooting conditions, face selection may be suspended at the close of burst shooting.
• Faces can be detected with the camera in vertical or horizontal orientation.
• If the camera is unable to detect the subject’s eyes because they are
hidden by hair, glasses, or other objects, the camera will instead focus
on faces.
• Face/eye detection options can also be accessed via shortcuts
(P 288).
156
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
Choose whether the camera prioritizes subjects of a selected
type, such as animals or vehicles, when setting focus.
Option
Description
Select one of the subject types listed below to enable subject
detection.
• E ANIMAL: The camera detects and tracks focus on dogs and
cats.
• F BIRD: The camera detects and tracks focus on birds.
• G AUTOMOBILE: The camera detects and tracks focus on
the body or front ends of cars, primarily those of types used
SUBJECT
DETECTION ON for motor sports.
• H MOTORCYCLE&BIKE: The camera detects and tracks
focus on the riders of motorcycles and bicycles.
• I AIRPLANE: The camera detects and tracks focus on the
cockpits, noses, or bodies of airplanes.
• J TRAIN: The camera detects and tracks focus on the driver
compartments or front ends of trains.
OFF
Subject detection off.
ly selects OFF for g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING.
157
6
The Shooting Menus
O Enabling subject detection via SUBJECT DETECTION ON automatical-
N • A single subject of the chosen type detected in or near the focus area
will be marked with a white frame.
• If multiple subjects are detected in the focus area, the camera will
select one automatically.
• You can choose a different subject by tapping the display to reposition the focus area. The focus stick (focus lever) can also be used if
z WIDE is selected for AF MODE.
• When DIRECT AF POINT SELECTION or EDIT FOCUS AREA is chosen for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FOCUS LEVER SETTING >
TILT o, you can also switch subjects using the focus stick (focus lever)
or (during viewfinder photography) touch controls (P 31).
• If the selected subject leaves the frame, the camera will wait a set
time for its return and consequently the white frame may sometimes
appear in locations where no subject of the chosen type is seen.
• Depending on shooting conditions, subject detection may be suspended at the close of burst shooting.
• Subjects can be detected with the camera in vertical or horizontal
orientation.
• Subject detection options can also be accessed via shortcuts
(P 288).
6
The Shooting Menus
158
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
AF+MF
If ON is selected and focus has been locked (whether by pressing
the shutter button halfway or by other means), focus lock can be
ended and focus adjusted manually by rotating the focus ring.
Options
ON
OFF
O • Lenses with a focus distance indicator must be set to manual focus
mode (MF) before this option can be used. Selecting MF disables the
focus distance indicator.
• If the lens is equipped with a focus distance indicator, set the focus
ring to the center, as the camera may fail to focus if the ring is set to
infinity or the minimum focus distance.
N • The previously-selected focus mode will be restored if no operations
are performed for a set period after the focus ring is rotated.
• DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE and DIGITAL MICROPRISM focus assist options selected via MF ASSIST cannot be used.
159
6
The Shooting Menus
AF + MF Focus Zoom
Selecting ON for G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS CHECK when SINGLE
POINT is chosen for AF MODE lets you zoom in on the current focus area
by rotating the focus ring. The zoom ratio can be selected using the rear
command dial.
MF ASSIST
Choose how focus is displayed in manual focus mode (P 103).
Option
Description
Displays a black-and-white (MONOCHROME) or color (COLOR)
DIGITAL SPLIT split image in the center of the frame. Frame the subject in the
IMAGE
split-image area and rotate the focus ring until the four parts of
the split image are correctly aligned.
A grid pattern that emphasizes blur is displayed when the subject
DIGITAL
is out of focus, disappearing to be replaced by a sharp image when
MICROPRISM
the subject is in focus.
FOCUS PEAK The camera heightens high-contrast outlines. Choose a color and
HIGHLIGHT peaking level.
Focus is displayed normally (focus peaking, digital split image, and
OFF
digital microprism are not available).
6
FOCUS CHECK
If ON is selected, the display will automatically zoom in on the
selected focus area when the focus ring is rotated in manual focus mode.
The Shooting Menus
Options
ON
OFF
N • Press the focus stick (focus lever) to cancel focus zoom.
• The zoom position is centered on the current focus area and changes
when the focus area is changed.
160
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA
Choose ON to meter the current focus frame when SPOT or
MULTI metering is selected.
Options
ON
OFF
xF INSTANT AF SETTING
Chooses how the camera focuses when a button to which focus
lock or AF-ON is assigned is pressed with MANUAL FOCUS selected for FOCUS MODE.
Option
AF-S
AF-C
Description
The camera focuses when the button is pressed.
The camera focuses while the button is pressed.
N Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 206).
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
Choose the basis for the depth-of-field scale.
6
Description
Provides a precision reference for use when assessing depth of field
PIXEL BASIS for pictures that will be viewed at high resolutions on computers
or other electronic displays.
Provides a practical reference for use when assessing depth of field
FILM FORMAT
for pictures that will be viewed at lower resolutions, for example
BASIS
as prints.
N Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 206).
161
The Shooting Menus
Option
RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY
Choose how the camera focuses when the shutter button is
pressed all the way down with SINGLE AF or CONTINUOUS AF
selected for FOCUS MODE.
Option
RELEASE
FOCUS
Description
Shutter response is prioritized over focus. Pictures can be taken
when the camera is not in focus.
Focus is prioritized over shutter response. Pictures can be only
taken when the camera is in focus.
O Regardless of the option selected, pictures can still be taken when the
camera is not in focus if ON is selected for AF+MF.
6
The Shooting Menus
162
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
xF AF RANGE LIMITER
Limit the range of available focus distances for increased focus
speed.
Option
OFF
CUSTOM
PRESET1
PRESET2
Description
Focus limiter disabled.
Limit focus to a range of distances defined by a minimum and
maximum.
• OK: Limit focus to the selected range.
• SET: Choose two objects and limit focus to the distance between them.
Limit focus to a preset range.
O • Choosing a focus range that includes distances shorter than the minimum focus distance of the lens disables the focus limiter.
• The values listed and displayed for the focus limiter may differ from
the actual focus distance.
• Focus range can be set independently on lenses equipped with focus range selectors. Be sure that the option selected in the camera
menus overlaps with that chosen with the lens.
-
range.
Instead of tapping an object in the display, you set the maximum
focus distance to infinity by rotating the focus ring.
• Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 206).
163
The Shooting Menus
N • The following additional operations can be performed when CUSTOM
is selected:
- You can tap objects in the touch screen display to choose the focus
6
TOUCH SCREEN MODE
Choose the shooting operations performed using touch controls.
Mode
Description
Tap your subject in the display to focus and release the shutter.
TOUCH
In burst mode, pictures will be taken while you keep your finger
SHOOTING on the display.
• In focus mode l (SINGLE AF), the camera focuses when you
AF
AF OFF
tap your subject in the display. Focus locks at the current distance until you tap the AF OFF icon.
• In focus mode k (CONTINUOUS AF), the camera initiates focus
when you tap your subject display. The camera will continue
to adjust focus for changes in the distance to the subject until
you tap the AF OFF icon.
• In manual focus mode p (MANUAL FOCUS), you can tap the
display to focus on the selected subject using autofocus.
AREA
Tap to select a point for focus or zoom. The focus frame will
move to the selected point.
OFF
Touch screen mode off.
6
The Shooting Menus
N • The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode.
• To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indicator, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN
SETTING > x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING.
164
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
Touch Controls for Focus Zoom
Different touch controls are used during focus zoom (focus check enabled).
Central Area
Tapping the center of the display performs the
operations below.
Mode
TOUCH SHOOTING
AF
AREA
OFF
Operation performed
SINGLE AF/MANUAL FOCUS: Take a picture
SINGLE AF: AF
MANUAL FOCUS: Instant AF
SINGLE AF: AF
MANUAL FOCUS: Instant AF
SINGLE AF/MANUAL FOCUS: OFF
Other Areas
Tapping other areas simply scrolls the display,
whether during still photography or movie recording and regardless of the option selected
for touch screen mode.
6
The Shooting Menus
165
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust shooting options for still photography.
To display shooting settings, press MENU/OK
in the photo shooting display and select
the A (SHOOTING SETTING) tab.
N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
SHOOTING SETTING
FILTER SETTING
SPORTS FINDER MODE
PRE-SHOT
SELF-TIMER
SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING
SELF-TIMER LAMP
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING
EXIT
FILTER SETTING
Choose the filter used when the mode dial is rotated to FILTER
(P 82).
SPORTS FINDER MODE
Take pictures using the crop in the center
of the display. Choose this option for pictures of athletes, birds, and other moving
subjects.
6
The Shooting Menus
Option
ON
OFF
Description
Pictures are taken using a 1.29× crop, reducing the picture angle by an
amount equivalent to increasing lens focal length by 1.29×; the crop
is shown by a frame in the display.
The 1.29× crop is disabled.
N • The H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > IMAGE SIZE item in the shooting menu is fixed at P.
• The sports finder is not available in modes that offer an electronic
shutter.
166
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
PRE-SHOT sJ
To reduce the lag between your pressing the shutter button all the
way down and the resulting picture being recorded to the memory
card, the camera starts shooting with the electronic shutter when the
shutter button is pressed halfway and saves a series shots starting
just before the shutter button is pressed the rest of the way down.
Options
ON
OFF
N • Pre-shot photography is available only when s ELECTRONIC
SHUTTER is selected in CH (high speed burst) drive mode (P 173).
• Flash photography is disabled.
6
The Shooting Menus
167
SELF-TIMER
Choose a shutter release delay.
Option
Description
The shutter is released two seconds after the shutter button is pressed.
Use to reduce blur caused by the camera moving when the shutter
R 2 SEC
button is pressed. The self-timer lamp blinks as the timer counts
down.
The shutter is released ten seconds after the shutter button is pressed.
S 10 SEC Use for photographs in which you wish to appear yourself. The
self-timer lamp blinks immediately before the picture is taken.
OFF
Self-timer off.
If an option other than OFF is selected, the
timer will start when the shutter button is
pressed all the way down. The display shows
the number of seconds remaining until the
shutter is released. To stop the timer before
the picture is taken, press DISP/BACK.
6
9
The Shooting Menus
O • Stand behind the camera when using the shutter button. Standing in
front of the lens can interfere with focus and exposure.
• The self-timer turns off automatically when the camera is turned off.
168
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING
If ON is selected, the setting chosen for SELF-TIMER will remain
in effect after the camera is turned off.
Options
ON
OFF
SELF-TIMER LAMP
If ON is selected, the self-timer lamp will light during self-timer
photography. Select OFF when shooting night scenes or in other
situations in which you would prefer that the lamp remain unlit.
Options
ON
OFF
6
The Shooting Menus
169
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
Configure the camera to take photos automatically at a preset
interval.
1
Highlight INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
in the A (SHOOTING SETTING) tab
and press MENU/OK.
2
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to
choose the interval and number of
shots. Press MENU/OK to proceed.
INTERVAL/NUMBER OF TIMES
INTERVAL
NUMBER OF TIMES
END
LATER
ESTIMATED START TIME
START
3
CANCEL
START WAITING TIME
PM
CANCEL
Use the focus stick to choose the
starting time and then press MENU/OK.
Shooting will start automatically.
6
The Shooting Menus
CANCEL
O Interval timer photography cannot be used at a shutter speed of
“bulb” or with multiple exposure photography. In burst mode, only
one picture will be taken each time the shutter is released.
N • Use of a tripod is recommended.
• We recommend using an AC-5VJ AC power adapter.
• The display turns off between shots and lights a few seconds before
the next shot is taken.
• The display can be activated at any time by pressing the shutter button.
• To continue shooting until the number of shots taken equals the
number of exposures remaining at the time interval-timer photography started, set the number of shots to ∞.
170
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING
Select ON to automatically adjust exposure during interval-timer
photography to prevent it changing dramatically between shots.
Options
ON
OFF
O • Large changes in subject brightness may make exposure appear er-
ratic. We recommend that you choose shorter values for INTERVAL
TIMER SHOOTING > INTERVAL with subjects that brighten or dim
dramatically during shooting.
• In manual mode (mode M), exposure smoothing is only available if an
AUTO option is selected for ISO.
6
The Shooting Menus
171
AE BKT SETTING
Adjust exposure bracketing settings.
Option
Description
Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence
and the amount exposure is varied with each shot.
FRAMES: Choose the number of shots in the bracketing
•
FRAMES/STEP SETTING
sequence.
• STEP: Choose the amount exposure is varied with each
shot.
• 1 FRAME: The shots in the bracketing sequence are taken
one at a time.
1 FRAME/CONTINUOUS
• CONTINUOUS: The shots in the bracketing sequence are
taken in a single burst.
SEQUENCE SETTING Choose the order in which the shots are taken.
FILM SIMULATION BKT
Choose the three film simulation types used for film simulation
bracketing (P 132).
6
The Shooting Menus
FOCUS BKT SETTING
Choose from AUTO and MANUAL focus bracketing modes
(P 116).
PHOTOMETRY
Choose how the camera meters exposure (P 107).
172
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
SHUTTER TYPE
Choose the shutter type. Choose the electronic shutter to mute
the shutter sound.
Option
t MECHANICAL SHUTTER
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER
t E-FRONT CURTAIN
SHUTTER
u MECHANICAL +
ELECTRONIC
v E-FRONT +
MECHANICAL
Description
Take pictures with the mechanical shutter.
Take pictures with the electronic shutter.
Take pictures with the electronic front curtain shutter.
The camera chooses the mechanical or electronic
shutter according to shooting conditions.
The camera chooses the mechanical or electronic
front curtain shutter according to shooting conditions.
The camera chooses the mechanical, electronic, or
w E-FRONT +
electronic front curtain shutter according to shooting
MECHANICAL + ELECTRONIC
conditions.
O • When using the electronic shutter, note the following:
- Distortion may be visible in shots of moving subjects.
- Distortion may also be visible in hand-held shots taken at high
-
• When using the electronic front-curtain shutter, note the following:
- Faster shutter speeds are more likely to result in uneven exposure
and loss of resolution in out-of-focus areas of the frame.
N The following restrictions apply when the electronic shutter is used:
• Sensitivity is restricted to values of ISO 12800–125
• Long exposure noise reduction has no effect
• The flash will not fire unless pixel-shift multi-shot is enabled.
173
6
The Shooting Menus
-
shutter speeds; use of a tripod is recommended.
Banding and fog may occur in shots taken under fluorescent lights
or other flickering or erratic illumination.
When taking pictures with the shutter muted (P 254), respect
your subjects’ image rights and right to privacy.
FLICKER REDUCTION
Reduce flicker in pictures and the display when shooting under
fluorescent lighting and other similar light sources.
Option
Description
Flicker reduction is applied to all frames continuous
shooting frame rate reduces.
Flicker measurement is taken prior to the first frame only
and the same reduction amount is applied to all subsequent frames that flicker may occur.
Flicker reduction disabled.
ALL FRAMES
FIRST FRAME
OFF
O • Flicker reduction increases the time needed to record pictures.
• OFF is selected for FLICKER REDUCTION when the electronic shutter is used.
• Flicker reduction is not available during movie recording.
6
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
Select ON to allow shutter speed to be fine-tuned to reduce flicker caused by LED lighting and the like.
Options
The Shooting Menus
ON
N This option takes effect only in modes S and M.
174
OFF
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
IS MODE
Turn image stabilization on or off.
Option
CONTINUOUS
SHOOTING ONLY
OFF
Description
Image stabilization on.
Image stabilization enabled only when the shutter button
is released (or, if CONTINUOUS AF is selected for G AF/
MF SETTING > FOCUS MODE, while the shutter button is pressed halfway).
Image stabilization off ; x appears in the display.
N • The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any,
takes priority over the setting chosen with IS MODE.
• Note that vibration or camera sounds may be noticeable as image
stabilization takes effect.
ISO
Adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light (P 105).
Option
2.0x
1.4x
OFF
Description
Take pictures using 2× zoom. O- and P-size pictures
are automatically cropped to size Q.
Take pictures using 1.4× zoom. O-size pictures are automatically cropped to size P.
Digital teleconverter off.
O Image quality may drop when the digital teleconverter is used.
N The digital teleconverter cannot be used when a 1.29× crop is selected
during burst photography or when ON is selected for SPORTS FINDER
MODE.
175
6
The Shooting Menus
DIGITAL TELE-CONV.
Zoom in on your subject during shooting using ultra-high-resolution digital zoom.
xF COOLING FAN SETTING
Adjust settings for optional cooling fans (P 336).
Option
AUTO1
AUTO2
LOW
HIGH
OFF
6
Description
The fan turns on automatically as required when camera
temperature rises and runs at slow speed.
The fan turns on automatically as required when camera
temperature rises and runs at high speed. The increased
fan noise may be audible in movies.
Run the fan continuously at low speed.
Run the fan continuously at high speed. The increased fan
noise may be audible in movies.
Turn the fan off.
The Shooting Menus
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
Connect to smartphones running the latest version of apps. The
smartphone can then be used to:
• Control the camera and take pictures remotely
• Receive pictures uploaded from the camera
• Browse the pictures on the camera and download selected pictures
• Upload location data to the camera
N For more information, visit:
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/
176
FLASH SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust flash-related settings for still photography.
To display flash settings, press MENU/OK
in the photo shooting display and select
the F (FLASH SETTING) tab.
FLASH SETTING
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
RED EYE REMOVAL
TTL-LOCK MODE
LED LIGHT SETTING
COMMANDER SETTING
CH SETTING
EXIT
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
Choose a flash control mode, flash mode,
or sync mode or adjust the flash level.
The options available vary with the flash.
N For more information on flash settings, see
“External Flash Units” (P 317) in “Peripherals and Optional Accessories”.
MODE
EF-X8
ADJUST
END
RED EYE REMOVAL
Remove red-eye effects caused by the flash.
Description
Flash red-eye reduction only.
Flash red-eye reduction and digital red-eye removal off.
The Shooting Menus
Option
FLASH
OFF
6
N Flash red-eye reduction can be used in TTL flash control mode.
177
TTL-LOCK MODE
Instead of adjusting flash level with each shot, TTL flash control
can be locked for consistent results across a series of photographs.
Option
Description
Flash output is locked at the value metered for the most
LOCK WITH LAST FLASH
recent photo.
LOCK WITH METERING The camera emits a series of pre-flashes and locks flash
FLASH
output at the metered value.
N • To use TTL lock, assign TTL-LOCK to a camera control and then use
the control to enable or disable TTL lock (P 297).
• Flash compensation can be adjusted while TTL lock is in effect.
• Selecting LOCK WITH LAST FLASH displays an error message if no
previously metered value exists.
6
LED LIGHT SETTING
Choose whether to use the flash unit’s LED video light (if available) as a catchlight or AF-assist illuminator when taking photos.
The Shooting Menus
Option
CATCHLIGHT
AF ASSIST
AF ASSIST+CATCHLIGHT
OFF
Role of LED video light in still photography
Catchlight
AF-assist illuminator
AF-assist illuminator and catchlight
None
N In some cases, this option can also be accessed via the FLASH FUNCTION
SETTING menu.
178
FLASH SETTING (Still Photography)
COMMANDER SETTING
Choose groups when using the camera flash unit as a commander for Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control. This option is
available when the camera is used with clip-on flash units that
support Fujifilm optical wireless flash control.
Options
Gr A
Gr B
Gr C
OFF
N In some cases, this option can also be accessed via the FLASH FUNCTION
SETTING menu.
CH SETTING
Choose the channel used for communication between the commander and remote flash units. Separate channels can be used
for different flash systems or to prevent interference when multiple systems are operating in close proximity.
Options
CH1
CH2
CH3
6
CH4
The Shooting Menus
179
MOVIE SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust options for movies shot during still photography using the t (movie recording) button.
To display movie settings, press MENU/OK
in the photo shooting display and select
the B (MOVIE SETTING) tab.
N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
MOVIE SETTING
MOVIE MODE
HIGH SPEED REC
MEDIA REC SETTING
F IS MODE
F IS MODE BOOST
AUDIO SETTING
EXIT
MOVIE MODE
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 185). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.
HIGH SPEED REC
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 186). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.
6
The Shooting Menus
MEDIA REC SETTING
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 187). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.
F IS MODE
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 195). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.
F IS MODE BOOST
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 195). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.
180
MOVIE SETTING (Still Photography)
AUDIO SETTING
Adjust audio-related settings for movie recording.
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the recording level for the built-in microphone.
Option
AUTO
MANUAL
OFF
Description
The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recording
levels.
Turn the built-in microphone off.
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the recording level for external microphones.
Option
AUTO
MANUAL
OFF
Description
The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recording
levels.
Disable recording using external microphones.
6
Option
MIC
LINE
Description
Choose this option for direct connection to an external microphone.
Choose this option for external audio devices connected via
line output.
MIC LEVEL LIMITER
Reduces distortion caused by input that exceeds the limits of the
microphone’s audio circuits.
Options
ON
OFF
181
The Shooting Menus
MIC JACK SETTING
Specify the type of hardware connected to the microphone jack.
WIND FILTER
Choose whether to enable wind noise reduction during movie
recording.
Options
ON
OFF
LOW CUT FILTER
Choose whether to enable the low-cut filter, reducing low-frequency noise during movie recording.
Options
ON
HEADPHONES VOLUME
Adjust the headphone volume.
Option
0
1—10
6
The Shooting Menus
182
Description
Mute output to the headphones.
Choose a volume of from 1 to 10.
OFF
MOVIE SETTING (Still Photography)
XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING
Adjust microphone input channel settings and the like for use
with XLR microphone adapters.
Option
N • If an external microphone is connected to the camera’s microphone
jack, audio will be recorded not via the camera’s built-in microphone
but via the external microphone instead.
• Four-channel recording is available only when MOV is selected for
movie file format.
183
6
The Shooting Menus
Description
Record four-channel (quadraphonic) sound with the
help of the camera’s built-in microphone, or two-channel
(stereo) sound using only a microphone connected via the
XLR microphone adapter.
MIC INPUT CHANNEL • 4ch XLR+CAMERA: Record four-channel sound with
the help of the camera’s built-in microphone.
• 2ch XLR ONLY: Record two-channel sound using
only an external microphone connected via the XLR
microphone adapter.
Choose the source of sound output to headphones or
other audio monitors during movie recording.
XLR: Monitor sound from external microphones con•
4ch AUDIO MONITORING
nected via the XLR microphone adapter.
• CAMERA: Monitor sound from camera’s built-in microphone.
Choose source of audio output to the HDMI connector.
• XLR: Audio from external microphones connected via
HDMI 4ch AUDIO
the XLR microphone adapter is output to the HDMI conOUTPUT
nector.
• CAMERA: Audio from camera’s built-in microphone is
output to the HDMI connector.
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust movie-recording options.
To display options for movie recording,
press MENU/OK in the movie shooting display and select the B (MOVIE SETTING)
tab.
MOVIE SETTING
MOVIE SETTING LIST
SHOOTING MODE
MOVIE MODE
HIGH SPEED REC
MEDIA REC SETTING
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
DIGITAL ZOOM
EXIT
MOVIE SETTING LIST
View current movie recording settings.
N These options can also be viewed by pressing the DISP/BACK button while
the movie quick menu is displayed.
SHOOTING MODE
Choose a shooting mode for movies.
Options
6
PROGRAM AE
The Shooting Menus
184
SHUTTER
PRIORITY AE
APERTURE
PRIORITY AE
MANUAL
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
MOVIE MODE
Before shooting movies, choose the
frame rate and the frame size and aspect
ratio.
MOVIE MODE
3840 × 2160
1h18m31s
HIGH QUALITY 4K MOVIE
WITH 8K OVERSAMPLING
CANNOT USE S.S. SLOWER THAN FRAMERATE
END
CANCEL
In the shooting menu, select B MOVIE SETTING, then highlight MOVIE MODE and press MENU/OK.
2
Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight the
desired frame size and aspect ratio (A) and press the stick
right.
• Choose V16 : 9 for 8 K movies with an aspect ratio of 16 : 9.
• Choose J16 : 9 for 6.2 K movies with an aspect ratio of
16 : 9.
• Choose T16:9 or W17:9 for high-quality 4 K movies
with aspect ratios of 16 or 17 to 9.
• Choose V16 : 9 or d17 : 9 for 4K movies with aspect ratios of 16 or 17 to 9.
• Choose W16 : 9 or W17 : 9 for Full HD movies with aspect
ratios of 16 or 17 to 9.
3
Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight a
frame rate (B) and press MENU/OK.
23.98P
24P
25P
Options
29.97P
50P
59.94P
N The choice of frame rates varies with the movie mode.
185
6
The Shooting Menus
1
HIGH SPEED REC
Record high-frame-rate movies. High-frame-rate movies can be
played back in slow motion, giving you time to view fast-moving
subjects or details too fleeting for the naked eye. Select ON to
choose the recording and playback rates separately.
N Choose ON HDMI ONLY to record footage only to external recorders
connected via HDMI. Note that this option does not support playback
frame-rate selection.
Frame Size
Options
W16 : 9
W17 : 9
Playback
23.98P
6
24P
25P
Options
29.97P
50P
59.94P
Recording
The Shooting Menus
Options
100P
120P
200P
240P
N • High-speed movies are recorded with no sound.
• The footage recorded to the memory card is compressed with the
goal of maintaining the selected bit rate.
• The options available for playback rate vary with the option selected
for rate of recording.
186
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
MEDIA REC SETTING
Choose movie file settings, including destination, file type, bit
rate, and proxy video.
MEDIA REC SETTING
Choose movie file settings, including destination, file type, and
compression.
Destination
Choose save options and save and output destinations for movies.
Option
P
Q
R
T
U
Description
Movies are recorded only to the memory card in Slot 1.
Movies are recorded only to the memory card in Slot 2.
Footage is recorded to the memory card in Slot 1 until the card
fills. Any additional footage will then automatically be recorded to the card in Slot 2.
Each movie is recorded twice, once to each card.
Movies are recorded only to devices connected via HDMI.
187
6
The Shooting Menus
O The current movie mode applies to both copies; settings for backup
copies cannot be adjusted separately.
File Type and Compression
Choose the movie file type and compression.
Option
H.264 ALL-I 420 MOV
H.264 LongGOP 420 MOV
H.264 LongGOP 420 MP4
H.265 ALL-I 420 MOV
H.265 LongGOP 420 MOV
6
The Shooting Menus
H.265 ALL-I 422 MOV
H.265 LongGOP 422 MOV
ProRes HQ MOV *
ProRes 422 MOV *
ProRes LT MOV *
Description
A highly-portable compressed format. Footage is
recorded at a depth of 8 bits using All-I interframe
compression and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma sub-sampling.
A highly-portable compressed format. Footage is
recorded at a depth of 8 bits using Long GOP interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma sub-sampling.
A format suitable for movies that will be uploaded
to the web.
A format with a higher compression ratio than
H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits using All-I interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma
sub-sampling.
A format with a higher compression ratio than
H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits using Long GOP interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 0
chroma sub-sampling.
A format with a higher compression ratio than
H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits using All-I interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 2 chroma
sub-sampling.
A format with a higher compression ratio than
H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits using Long GOP interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 2
chroma sub-sampling.
Record movies in ProRes 422 HQ format.
Record movies in ProRes 422 format.
Record movies in ProRes 422 LT format.
* Available only when P is selected as the destination.
188
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
N • The ProRes format is intended for the footage will be edited on a
computer or the like.
• 4 : 2 : 2 chroma sub-sampling is used for footage output to external
devices connected via HDMI; H.264 footage is output at a bit depth of
8 bits and footage in other formats at a depth of 10 bits.
• All-I compresses each frame separately. Files are larger, but the fact
that the data for each frame are saved separately makes this a good
choice for footage that will be further processed.
• Long GOP balances good image quality with high compression. Files
are smaller, making it a good choice for longer movies.
• The options available for file type and compression vary with the options selected for MOVIE MODE, HIGH SPEED REC, and F-Log/HLG
RECORDING.
Bit Rate
Choose the movie bit rate.
50Mbps
100Mbps
Options
200Mbps
360Mbps
720Mbps
N • The options available for bit rate vary with the settings chosen for
189
6
The Shooting Menus
high-speed movie recording and compression. The actual bit rate
may be slower than the selected value depending on the subject.
• The bit rate for ProRes movies is set automatically according to the format chosen and the frame size and rate. For more information, visit the
Apple website.
PROXY SETTING (ONLY WHEN REC ProRes)
Choose whether the camera simultaneously records a duplicate
“proxy” video with movies shot in ProRes format.
Option
Description
ON (H.264)
Record proxy videos in H.264 format.
ON (ProRes Proxy) Record proxy videos in ProRes Proxy format.
OFF
Proxy recording disabled.
O • Proxy recording is not available at a frame size of 8K if the frame rate
is either 29.97P or 25P.
• Deleting the original footage from the camera also deletes the proxy
video. The original and proxy videos cannot be deleted separately.
• When deleting movies from camera memory cards using a computer,
be sure to delete both the originals and the proxies.
6
The Shooting Menus
190
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING
Adjust settings for use when the shooting display is output to an
HDMI device.
HDMI OUTPUT INFO DISPLAY
If ON is selected, HDMI devices to which the camera is connected
will mirror the information in the camera display.
Options
ON
OFF
HDMI REC CONTROL
Choose whether the camera sends movie start and stop signals
to the HDMI device when the shutter button is pressed to start
and stop movie recording.
Options
ON
OFF
Option
Description
RAW OUTPUT
Output RAW footage to ATOMOS video recorders.
SETTING ATOMOS
RAW OUTPUT
Output RAW footage to Blackmagic Design video recorders.
SETTING Blackmagic
OFF
Do not output RAW footage to external recorders.
191
6
The Shooting Menus
RAW OUTPUT SETTING
Choose whether to output RAW footage to external recorders
connected via HDMI.
N • Movie frame size automatically changes to 8K.
• RAW footage output to external devices is not saved to the memory
cards inserted in the camera.
• In-camera image enhancements are not applied to the RAW output.
• ISO sensitivity is restricted to values between ISO 800 and ISO 12800.
• Footage output to external devices is generated from the original
RAW data and its quality, which varies with device specifications, may
not be equal to that achieved as the end result of post-production
or the like.
• Focus zoom is not available when RAW is selected for HDMI output.
• RAW footage output via HDMI to incompatible devices will not display correctly but will instead will display as a mosaic.
• RAW output is disabled in some movie and high-speed recording
modes.
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
Fix the movie crop ratio at 1.25∶1. This makes it easier to match
crops after changing movie settings.
Options
6
ON
OFF
The Shooting Menus
DIGITAL ZOOM
Zoom in on your subject during shooting (compatible lenses only).
Option
ON
OFF
192
Description
Digital zoom enabled. The zoom ratio can be adjusted. Pressing the DRIVE button cancels digital zoom.
Digital zoom disabled.
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
F-Log/HLG RECORDING
Choose the destination for F‐Log and HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma)
movies shot while the camera is connected to an HDMI device.
Option
Description
The footage is processed using film simulation and both
cPYP
saved to the memory card and output to the HDMI device.
The footage is recorded to the memory card and output to
c F-Log Y F-Log
the HDMI device in F-Log format.
The footage is recorded to the memory card and output to
c FLog2 Y FLog2
the HDMI device in F-Log2 format.
The footage is recorded to the memory card and output to
c HLG Y HLG
the HDMI device in HLG format.
N • F-Log and FLog2 offer gentle gamma curves with wide gamuts suit-
193
6
The Shooting Menus
able for further processing post-production. Sensitivity is restricted to
values between ISO 500 and ISO 12800 (F-Log) or between ISO 1000
and ISO 12800 (FLog2).
• The HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma) recording format conforms to the international ITU-R BT2100 standard. When viewed on HLG-compatible
displays, high-quality HLG footage faithfully captures high-contrast
scenes and vivid colors. Sensitivity is restricted to values between
ISO 800 and ISO 12800.
• Film simulation (P) footage is recorded using the option selected
for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > F FILM SIMULATION in the
shooting menu.
DATA LEVEL SETTING
Choose a signal range for movie recording.
Option
VIDEO RANGE
FULL RANGE
Description
The signal range for 8-bit movies is limited to 16–235 and that
for 10-bit movies to 64–940.
The signal ranges for 8-bit and 10-bit movies are respectively
0–255 and 0–1023.
F PHOTOMETRY
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 107).
F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 174).
Options
ON
6
The Shooting Menus
194
OFF
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
F IS MODE
Turn image stabilization on or off.
Option
IBIS/OIS
IBIS/OIS + DIS
OFF
Description
Enable in-body (IBIS) and optical (OIS) image stabilization.
IBIS is used with lenses that do not support OIS.
Enable in-body (IBIS), optical (OIS), and digital (DIS) image
stabilization. The crop is adjusted according to the option
selected for MOVIE MODE.
Image stabilization off ; x appears in the display.
N • The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any,
takes priority over the setting chosen with the IS mode.
• Note that vibration or camera sounds may be noticeable as image
stabilization takes effect.
F IS MODE BOOST
Choose the image stabilization level.
Option
ON
OFF
Description
Suitable for hand-held shooting with no panning.
Suitable for hand-held shooting with panning.
6
bilization level to be changed while recording is in progress (P 297).
195
The Shooting Menus
N Assigning IS MODE BOOST to a function button allows the image sta-
F ISO
Adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light.
Option
H (25600)
125–12800
AUTO
Description
Choose for special situations. Note that dynamic range may be
reduced and that pictures may be mottled.
Adjust sensitivity manually. Selected value is shown in display.
Sensitivity is automatically adjusted in response to shooting
conditions.
ZEBRA SETTING
Highlights that may be overexposed are shown by zebra stripes
in the movie mode display.
Option
ZEBRA RIGHT
ZEBRA LEFT
OFF
6
Description
Right-slanting stripes.
Left-slanting stripes.
Stripes off.
The Shooting Menus
ZEBRA LEVEL
Choose the brightness threshold for the zebra stripe display.
50
196
55
60
65
70
Options
75
80
85
90
95
100
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
Select ON to allow movie settings to be adjusted using only the
command dials and touch-screen controls. You may find this
helpful in preventing the sounds of camera controls being recorded with movies (P 33).
Options
ON
OFF
TALLY LIGHT
Choose the lamp (indicator or AF-assist) that lights during movie
recording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady.
Indicator lamp
6
Description
The indicator lamp lights during movie recording.
The indicator lamp blinks during movie recording.
The indicator and AF-assist lamps light during movie recording.
The AF-assist lamp lights during movie recording.
The indicator and AF-assist lamps blink during movie recording.
The AF-assist lamp blinks during movie recording.
The indicator and AF-assist lamps remain off during movie recording.
197
The Shooting Menus
Option
FRONT OFF
REAR z
FRONT OFF
REAR y
FRONT z
REAR z
FRONT z
REAR OFF
FRONT y
REAR y
FRONT y
REAR OFF
FRONT OFF
REAR OFF
AF-assist illuminator
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
xF COOLING FAN SETTING
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 176).
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 83).
F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 144).
xF CUSTOM MODE SETTING
Choose whether the current custom settings bank is to be used
for still photography or movie recording (P 83).
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 176).
6
The Shooting Menus
198
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust image quality settings for movies.
To display image quality settings, press
MENU/OK in the movie shooting display and
select the H (IMAGE QUALITY SETTING)
tab.
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
FFILM SIMULATION
FMONOCHROMATIC COLOR
FWHITE BALANCE
FDYNAMIC RANGE
FTONE CURVE
FCOLOR
FSHARPNESS
FHIGH ISO NR
EXIT
N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
F FILM SIMULATION
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 132).
F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 134).
6
The Shooting Menus
199
F WHITE BALANCE
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 136).
F DYNAMIC RANGE
Choose a dynamic range for movie recording.
Option
V100%
W200%
X400%
Description
See “DYNAMIC RANGE” (P 140).
N • AUTO (automatic dynamic range control) is not available during
movie recording.
• W200% is available at sensitivities of from ISO 250 to ISO 12800,
X400% at sensitivities of from ISO 500 to 12800.
item is available when cPYP is selected for B MOVIE
SETTING > F-Log/HLG RECORDING.
• This
6
The Shooting Menus
F TONE CURVE
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 141).
F COLOR
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 141).
200
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording)
F SHARPNESS
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 141).
F HIGH ISO NR
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 142).
INTERFRAME NR
Select AUTO to automatically adjust interframe noise reduction
according to shooting conditions.
Options
AUTO
OFF
N “Ghosting” may occur with moving subjects or if the camera is moved
during shooting.
6
The Shooting Menus
201
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording)
F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION
Select ON to enable peripheral illumination correction during
movie recording.
Options
ON
OFF
N • If ON is selected when a lens that does not transmit data to the camera
is attached, peripheral illumination will be adjusted according to the
option selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > xF MOUNT
ADAPTER SETTING > PERIPHERAL ILLUMINATION CORRECTION
in the shooting menu (P 147).
• Select OFF if you notice banding in movies recorded using this option.
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 145). Changes to
one apply to the other.
6
The Shooting Menus
202
AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust focus settings for movies.
To display AF/MF settings, press MENU/OK
in the movie shooting display and select
the G (AF/MF SETTING) tab.
AF/MF SETTING
FFOCUS AREA
F FOCUS MODE
F AF MODE
FAF-C CUSTOM SETTING
xFAF ILLUMINATOR
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
FSUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
FAF+MF
EXIT
N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
F FOCUS AREA
Choose the focus area for autofocus, manual focus, and focus
zoom (P 96).
O The focus area cannot be resized while recording is in progress.
F FOCUS MODE
Choose the focus mode for movie recording.
6
The Shooting Menus
Option
Description
p MANUAL FOCUS Focus manually.
k CONTINUOUS AF The camera focuses using AF-C.
The camera focuses using AF-S.
l SINGLE AF
203
F AF MODE
Choose how the camera selects the focus point for movie recording.
Option
MULTI
AREA
Description
The camera selects the focus area automatically.
The camera focuses on the subject in the selected focus area.
F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING
Select focus-tracking options when recording movies with
CONTINUOUS AF selected for F FOCUS MODE.
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
Choose how long the camera waits to switch focus when an object enters the focus area behind or in front of the current subject. See “TRACKING SENSITIVITY” (P 150).
0
6
Options
2
1
3
4
The Shooting Menus
O • The higher the value, the longer it takes the camera to refocus when
you attempt to switch subjects.
• The lower the value, the more likely the camera is to switch focus
from your subject to other objects in the focus area.
AF SPEED
Adjust the autofocus response speed. Choose higher values for
faster response times, lower values for slower response times.
−5
204
−4
−3
−2
−1
Options
0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)
xF AF ILLUMINATOR
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 154). Changes to
one apply to the other.
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
Enable or disable Intelligent Face Detection when recording
movies.
Option
FACE DETECTION ON
OFF
Description
See “g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING” (P 155).
Intelligent Face Detection and eye priority off.
O If SINGLE AF is chosen for FOCUS MODE when FACE DETECTION
ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION
SETTING, the camera will automatically switch to CONTINUOUS AF.
Selecting MANUAL FOCUS when FACE DETECTION ON is selected
for Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING disables Intelligent Face
Detection.
O The camera automatically switches to continuous AF when SUBJECT
DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > F SUBJECT
DETECTION SETTING, even if SINGLE AF is selected for FOCUS
MODE. Subject detection is not available when MANUAL FOCUS is
selected.
F AF+MF
Select ON to enable manual focus in SINGLE AF and CONTINUOUS
AF modes. Manual focus can be suspended by pressing the AFON
button.
Options
ON
OFF
205
6
The Shooting Menus
F SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 157).
F MF ASSIST
Choose how focus is displayed when MANUAL FOCUS is selected for FOCUS MODE (P 103).
Option
Description
The camera heightens high-contrast outlines. Choose a
FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT
color and peaking level.
A needle indicates whether focus is in front of or behind
FOCUS METER
the subject.
FOCUS METER + PEAK
Focus is indicated by both a meter and peak highlights.
HIGHLIGHT
Focus is displayed normally (focus peaking and the focus
OFF
meter are not available).
F FOCUS CHECK
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 160).
6
The Shooting Menus
xF INSTANT AF SETTING
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 161). Changes to
one apply to the other.
N Instant AF is disabled during movie recording. Use instant AF to focus
before recording begins.
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 161). Changes to
one apply to the other.
xF AF RANGE LIMITER
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 163). Changes to
one apply to the other.
206
AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)
F TOUCH SCREEN MODE
Choose the shooting operations performed using touch controls.
Mode
AF
AREA
Touch screen mode off.
N • The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode.
• To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indicator, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN
SETTING > x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING.
207
6
The Shooting Menus
OFF
Description
Tapping the display focuses the camera on the selected point.
Use the shutter button to start and stop recording.
• When SINGLE AF is selected for FOCUS MODE, you can
refocus at any time by tapping your subject in the display.
• When CONTINUOUS AF is chosen for FOCUS MODE, the
camera will continuously adjust focus for changes in the distance to the subject at point selected by tapping the display.
• When MANUAL FOCUS is selected for FOCUS MODE, the
camera will focus using autofocus if you tap the display before
recording begins; during recording, you can tap the display
again to move the focus area to a new location.
Tap to position the focus area. Use the shutter button to start
and stop recording.
• When SINGLE AF is selected for FOCUS MODE, you can
reposition the focus area at any time by tapping your subject
in the display. To focus, use the button to which AF-ON is assigned.
• When CONTINUOUS AF is chosen for FOCUS MODE, the
camera will continuously adjust focus for changes in the distance to the subject at point selected by tapping the display.
• When MANUAL FOCUS is selected for FOCUS MODE,
you can tap the display to position the focus area over your
subject.
AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)
Touch Controls for Focus Zoom
Different touch controls are used during focus zoom (focus check enabled).
Central Area
Tapping the center of the display performs the
operations below.
Mode
AF
AREA
OFF
6
Operation performed
SINGLE AF: AF
MANUAL FOCUS: Instant AF
SINGLE AF: AF
MANUAL FOCUS: Instant AF
SINGLE AF/MANUAL FOCUS: OFF
The Shooting Menus
Other Areas
Tapping other areas simply scrolls the display,
whether during still photography or movie recording and regardless of the option selected
for touch screen mode.
FOCUS CHECK LOCK
Choose whether focus zoom remains in effect once movie recording begins.
Options
ON
208
OFF
AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust settings for audio recorded during filming.
To display audio settings, press MENU/OK
in the movie shooting display and select
the P (AUDIO SETTING) tab.
AUDIO SETTING
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
MIC JACK SETTING
MIC LEVEL LIMITER
WIND FILTER
LOW CUT FILTER
HEADPHONES VOLUME
XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING
EXIT
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the recording level for the built-in microphone.
Option
AUTO
MANUAL
OFF
Description
The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recording
levels.
Turn the built-in microphone off.
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the recording level for external microphones.
MANUAL
OFF
Description
The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recording
levels.
Disable recording using external microphones.
209
The Shooting Menus
Option
AUTO
6
MIC JACK SETTING
Specify the type of hardware connected to the microphone jack.
Option
MIC
LINE
Description
Choose this option for direct connection to an external microphone.
Choose this option for external audio devices connected via
line output.
MIC LEVEL LIMITER
Reduces distortion caused by input that exceeds the limits of the
microphone’s audio circuits.
Options
ON
OFF
WIND FILTER
Choose whether to enable wind noise reduction during movie
recording.
6
Options
The Shooting Menus
ON
OFF
LOW CUT FILTER
Choose whether to enable the low-cut filter, reducing low-frequency noise during movie recording.
Options
ON
HEADPHONES VOLUME
Adjust the headphone volume.
Option
0
1—10
210
Description
Mute output to the headphones.
Choose a volume of from 1 to 10.
OFF
AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording)
XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING
Adjust microphone input channel settings and the like for use
with XLR microphone adapters.
Option
N • If an external microphone is connected to the camera’s microphone
jack, audio will be recorded not via the camera’s built-in microphone
but via the external microphone instead.
• Four-channel recording is available only when MOV is selected for
movie file format.
211
6
The Shooting Menus
Description
Record four-channel (quadraphonic) sound with the
help of the camera’s built-in microphone, or two-channel
(stereo) sound using only a microphone connected via the
XLR microphone adapter.
MIC INPUT CHANNEL • 4ch XLR+CAMERA: Record four-channel sound with
the help of the camera’s built-in microphone.
• 2ch XLR ONLY: Record two-channel sound using
only an external microphone connected via the XLR
microphone adapter.
Choose the source of sound output to headphones or
other audio monitors during movie recording.
XLR: Monitor sound from external microphones con•
4ch AUDIO MONITORING
nected via the XLR microphone adapter.
• CAMERA: Monitor sound from camera’s built-in microphone.
Choose source of audio output to the HDMI connector.
• XLR: Audio from external microphones connected via
HDMI 4ch AUDIO
the XLR microphone adapter is output to the HDMI conOUTPUT
nector.
• CAMERA: Audio from camera’s built-in microphone is
output to the HDMI connector.
TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust time code (hour, minute, second, and frame number) display settings for movie recording.
To display time code settings, press
MENU/OK in the movie shooting display
and select the Q (TIME CODE SETTING)
tab.
TIME CODE SETTING
TIME CODE DISPLAY
START TIME SETTING
COUNT UP SETTING
DROP FRAME
HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT
EXIT
TIME CODE DISPLAY
Select ON to display time codes during movie recording and
playback.
Options
ON
6
START TIME SETTING
Choose the time code starting time.
The Shooting Menus
Option
Description
MANUAL INPUT Choose a start time manually.
CURRENT TIME Set the start time to the current time.
RESET
Set the start time to 00:00:00.
212
OFF
TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)
COUNT UP SETTING
Choose whether time is clocked continuously or only during
movie recording.
Option
REC RUN
FREE RUN
Description
Time is clocked only during movie recording.
Time is clocked continuously.
DROP FRAME
At frame rates of 59.94P, and 29.97P, a discrepancy will gradually develop between the time code (measured in seconds) and
the actual recording time (measured in fractions of a second).
Choose whether the camera drops frames as necessary to match
the recording time to the time code.
Option
ON
OFF
Description
The camera drops frames as necessary to maintain a strict
match between the time code and the actual recording time.
Frames are not dropped.
N • The time code display varies with the option selected.
6
The Shooting Menus
ON
OFF
• Selecting a frame rate of 23.98P disables frame drop.
213
TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)
HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT
Choose whether time codes are output to HDMI devices.
Options
ON
6
The Shooting Menus
214
OFF
Playback and the Playback
Menu
215
The Playback Display
This section lists the indicators that may be displayed during
playback.
O For illustrative purposes, displays are shown with all indicators lit.
A
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
m
l
k
j
i
h
g
12/31/2022
B CD E FG H I
J
1/999
K
f
e
d
c
L
b
a
Z
Y X
W
A Date and time..................................52, 54, 247
B Frame-number display
C Location data................................................286
D Bluetooth ON/OFF
E Image transfer order
F Image transfer status
G Number of frames selected for upload
H Protected image ...........................................229
I Card slot..........................................................221
J Frame number..............................................283
K Pixel-shift multi-shot ..................................125
L Low battery ......................................................51
M Image quality................................................129
N Movie mode ..................................................185
O HEIF ..................................................................131
P Image size ......................................................128
Q Film format ....................................................188
R Film simulation ............................................132
S Dynamic range ............................................140
T HDR ..................................................................118
216
V U T S R QP
O N M
U White balance ..............................................136
V Sensitivity .......................................................175
W Exposure compensation ............................108
X Aperture...............................................73, 76, 78
Y Time code.......................................................212
Z Shutter speed .....................................73, 74, 78
a Playback mode indicator .............................59
b Movie icon ........................................................69
c Four-channel (quadrophonic) audio
..............................................................183, 211
d HDR image ....................................................118
e Red-eye removal indicator........................177
f Filter ....................................................................82
g Face detection indicator ............................155
h Digital teleconverter ...................................175
i Photobook assist indicator .......................237
j DPOF print indicator ...................................239
k Rating..............................................................232
l Voice memo ..................................................231
m Gift image .........................................................59
The Playback Display
The DISP/BACK Button
The DISP/BACK button controls the display
of indicators during playback.
Standard
Information off
2022.12.31 1/999
1/999
12/31/2022
Playback and the Playback Menu
12/31/2022 1/999
NEXT
Info display
7
217
The Playback Display
Viewing Photo Information
The photo information display changes each
time the focus stick (focus lever) is pressed up.
Basic data
Info display 1
2022.12.31 1/999
1/999
12/31/2022
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
12/31/2022 1/999
NEXT
LENS
FOCAL LENGTH
COLOR SPACE
LENS MODULATION OPT.
S.S
F
23.0mm
F5.6
23.0mm
sRGB
ON
1/999
12/31/2022 12:10 AM
ISO
BACK
Info display 3
NEXT
Info display 2
Zooming in on the Focus Point
Press the center of the focus stick (focus lever) to zoom in on the focus
point. Press again to return to full-frame playback.
218
Viewing Pictures
Read this section for information on playback zoom and
multi-frame playback.
Use the rear command dial to go from
full-frame playback to playback zoom or
multi-frame playback.
Full-frame playback
DISP/BACK
MENU/OK
Nine-frame view
Medium zoom
Playback and the Playback Menu
Playback
zoom
Multi-frame
playback
7
Hundred- frame view
Maximum zoom
219
Viewing Pictures
Playback Zoom
Rotate the rear command dial right to zoom in on the current
picture, left to zoom out. To exit zoom, press DISP/BACK or MENU/OK.
N The maximum zoom ratio varies with the option selected for H IMAGE
QUALITY SETTING > IMAGE SIZE.
Scroll
When the picture is zoomed in, the focus stick
(focus lever) can be used to view areas of the
image not currently visible in the display.
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
Navigation window
Multi-Frame Playback
To change the number of images displayed, rotate the rear command dial left when a picture is displayed full frame.
N • Use the focus stick (focus lever) to highlight images and press MENU/OK
to view the highlighted image full frame.
• In the nine- and hundred-frame displays, press the focus stick up or
down to view more pictures.
220
The Playback Menu
Adjust playback settings.
The playback menu is displayed when
you press MENU/OK in playback mode.
PLAY BACK MENU
SWITCH SLOT
RAW CONVERSION
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION
ERASE
SIMULTANEOUS DELETE
CROP
RESIZE
PROTECT
EXIT
N If two memory cards are inserted, you can press and hold the a button to choose a card for playback.
Playback and the Playback Menu
SWITCH SLOT
Choose the card from which images will be played back.
7
221
RAW CONVERSION
Even if you don’t have a computer, you can use the camera to
modify RAW pictures and save them in other formats.
Saving RAW Pictures in Another Format
1
2
3
Display a RAW picture.
Highlight RAW CONVERSION in the playback menu.
Press MENU/OK.
A list of settings will be displayed.
RAW CONVERSION
Playback and the Playback Menu
REFLECT SHOOTING COND.
FILE TYPE
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
PUSH/PULL PROCESSING
DYNAMIC RANGE
CREATE
4
5
CANCEL
Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight a
setting.
Press the focus stick right to display
RAW CONVERSION
options.
100%
200%
400%
7
6
7
Press the focus stick up or down to highlight the desired option.
8
Press the Q button.
A preview of the copy will be displayed.
9
Press MENU/OK.
The copy will be saved.
Press MENU/OK to select the highlighted option. The settings
list shown in Step 3 will be displayed. Repeat Steps 4 to 7 to
adjust additional settings.
N RAW conversion options can also be displayed by pressing the Q button when a RAW pictures is displayed during playback.
222
The Playback Menu
The settings that can be adjusted when converting pictures from
RAW to another format are:
Setting
Description
O Some settings may be unavailable depending on the options chosen
when the picture was taken.
223
Playback and the Playback Menu
Create a copy using the settings in effect at the time the
REFLECT SHOOTING COND.
photo was taken.
FILE TYPE
Choose a file format.
IMAGE SIZE
Choose an image size.
IMAGE QUALITY
Adjust image quality.
PUSH/PULL PROCESSING Adjust exposure.
DYNAMIC RANGE
Enhance details in highlights for natural contrast.
Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows for natD RANGE PRIORITY
ural-looking results when photographing high-contrast
scenes.
FILM SIMULATION
Simulate the effects of different types of film.
Choose a monochrome tint for photographs takMONOCHROMATIC COLOR en using FILM SIMULATION > a ACROS and
b MONOCHROME.
GRAIN EFFECT
Add a film grain effect.
Increase the range of tones available for rendering colCOLOR CHROME EFFECT
ors that tend to be highly saturated, such as reds, yellows, and greens.
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE Increase the range of tones available for rendering blues.
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT
Smooth complexions.
WHITE BALANCE
Adjust white balance.
WB SHIFT
Fine-tune white balance.
TONE CURVE
Adjust highlights and shadows.
COLOR
Adjust color density.
SHARPNESS
Sharpen or soften outlines.
HIGH ISO NR
Process the copy to reduce mottling.
CLARITY
Increase definition.
Improve definition by adjusting for diffraction and the
LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER
slight loss of focus at the periphery of the lens.
COLOR SPACE
Choose the color space used for color reproduction.
HDR MODE
Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows.
DIGITAL TELE-CONV.
Switch to the crop in effect when the photo was taken.
7
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION
Convert HEIF pictures to JPEG or TIFF.
SELECT IMAGES
Select HEIF pictures for conversion.
FILE FORMAT
Choose a format for the converted pictures.
Playback and the Playback Menu
Options
TIFF 8bit
JPEG
TIFF 16bit
SELECT SLOT TO RECORD
Choose the memory card to which the converted pictures will
be saved.
Options
SLOT 1
7
224
SLOT 2
The Playback Menu
ERASE
Delete individual pictures, multiple selected pictures, or all pictures.
O Deleted pictures cannot be recovered. Protect important pictures or
copy them to a computer or other storage device before proceeding.
Option
FRAME
SELECTED FRAMES
ALL FRAMES
Description
Delete pictures one at a time.
Delete multiple selected pictures.
Delete all unprotected pictures.
2
Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to scroll through
pictures and press MENU/OK to delete.
N • A confirmation dialog is not displayed before pictures are deleted; be
sure the correct picture is selected before pressing MENU/OK.
• Additional pictures can be deleted by pressing MENU/OK. Press the focus stick left or right to scroll through pictures and press MENU/OK to
delete.
Playback and the Playback Menu
FRAME
1 Select FRAME for ERASE in the playback menu.
7
225
SELECTED FRAMES
1 Select SELECTED FRAMES for ERASE in the playback menu.
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
2
Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK to select.
• Selected pictures are indicated by check marks (R).
• To deselect a highlighted picture, press MENU/OK again.
3
When the operation is complete, press DISP/BACK to display a
confirmation dialog.
4
Highlight OK and press MENU/OK to delete the selected pictures.
N Pictures in photobooks or printer orders are shown by S.
ALL FRAMES
1 Select ALL FRAMES for ERASE in the playback menu.
2
A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight OK and
press MENU/OK to delete all unprotected pictures.
N • Pressing DISP/BACK cancels deletion; note that any pictures deleted
before the button was pressed cannot be recovered.
• If a message appears stating that the selected images are part of a
DPOF print order, press MENU/OK to delete the pictures.
226
The Playback Menu
SIMULTANEOUS DELETE
Taking photos with SEPARATE selected for D SAVE DATA
SET-UP > x CARD SLOT SETTING creates two copies. Choose
whether deleting the RAW image will also delete the JPEG or
HEIF copy.
Option
ON
OFF
Description
Deleting the RAW image from the card in Slot 1 also deletes the
JPEG or HEIF copy from the card in Slot 2.
Deleting the RAW image from the card in Slot 1 does not delete
the JPEG or HEIF copy from the card in Slot 2.
1
2
3
Display the desired picture.
4
5
Press MENU/OK to display a confirmation dialog.
Select CROP in the playback menu.
Use the rear command dial to zoom in and out and press the
focus stick (focus lever) up, down, left, or right to scroll the
picture until the desired portion is displayed.
Playback and the Playback Menu
CROP
Create a cropped copy of the current picture.
7
Press MENU/OK again to save the cropped copy to a separate
file.
N • The higher the zoom ratio, the smaller the number of pixels in the
cropped copy.
• If the size of the final copy will be a, YES will be displayed in yellow.
• All copies have an aspect ratio of 3∶2.
227
RESIZE
Create a small copy of the current picture.
1
2
3
Display the desired picture.
4
Press MENU/OK again to save the resized copy to a separate
file.
Select RESIZE in the playback menu.
Highlight a size and press MENU/OK to display a confirmation
dialog.
Playback and the Playback Menu
N The sizes available vary with the size of the original image.
7
228
The Playback Menu
PROTECT
Protect pictures from accidental deletion. Highlight one of the
following options and press MENU/OK.
Option
FRAME
SET ALL
RESET ALL
Description
Protect selected pictures. Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or
right to view pictures and press MENU/OK to select or deselect.
Press DISP/BACK when the operation is complete.
Protect all pictures.
Remove protection from all pictures.
during playback.
Playback and the Playback Menu
O Protected pictures will be deleted when the memory card is formatted.
N • Protecting images currently selected for upload to paired smartphones or tablets removes upload marking.
• Protection can also be added or removed by pressing the Fn1 button
7
229
IMAGE ROTATE
Rotate pictures.
1
2
3
4
Playback and the Playback Menu
5
Select ON for D SCREEN SET-UP > AUTOROTATE PB.
Display the desired picture.
Select IMAGE ROTATE in the playback menu.
Press the focus stick (focus lever) down to rotate the picture
90° clockwise, up to rotate it 90° counterclockwise.
Press MENU/OK. The picture will automatically be displayed in
the selected orientation whenever it is played back on the
camera.
N • Protected pictures cannot be rotated. Remove protection before rotating pictures.
• The camera may not be able to rotate pictures created with other
devices. Pictures rotated on the camera will not be rotated when
viewed on a computer or on other cameras.
• Pictures taken with D SCREEN SET-UP > AUTOROTATE PB are automatically displayed in the correct orientation during playback.
7
230
The Playback Menu
VOICE MEMO SETTING
Add a voice memo to the current photograph.
1
2
3
Select ON for VOICE MEMO SETTING in the playback menu.
Display a photo to which you wish to add a voice memo.
Press and hold the AFON button to record a voice memo.
Recording ends after 30 s or when you release the button.
Playing Voice Memos
Pictures with voice memos are indicated by q icons during playback.
• To play the memo, press the AFON button.
• A progress bar will be displayed while the memo plays back.
• Volume can be adjusted by pressing MENU/OK to pause playback and then
pressing the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to adjust the volume.
Press MENU/OK again to resume playback. Volume can also be adjusted using D SOUND SET-UP > PLAYBACK VOLUME.
Playback and the Playback Menu
N • The new memo will be recorded over any existing memos.
• Voice memos cannot be added to protected pictures.
• Deleting the picture also deletes the memo.
7
231
RATING
Rate pictures using stars.
1
2
Select RATING in the playback menu.
Rotate the front command dial to choose a picture and the
rear command dial to choose a rating of from 0 to 5 stars
(“I”).
Playback and the Playback Menu
N • The focus stick (focus lever) can be used in place of the front command dial to choose a picture.
• The rating dialog can also be displayed by pressing the AEL button in
single-frame, nine-frame, or hundred-frame playback.
• Use touch controls to zoom in or out.
• Ratings cannot be applied to:
- Protected pictures
- Movies
- “Gift” pictures (pictures taken with other cameras)
7
232
The Playback Menu
COPY
Copy pictures between the cards in the first and second slots.
1
2
Select COPY in the playback menu.
Highlight one of the following options.
Option
Description
Copy pictures from the card in the first slot to the card in
SLOT1 y SLOT2
the second slot.
Copy pictures from the card in the second slot to the card
SLOT2 y SLOT1
in the first slot.
Press the focus stick (focus lever) right.
Highlight one of the following options and press MENU/OK.
Option
FRAME
ALL FRAMES
Description
Copy selected pictures. Press the focus stick left or right to
view pictures and press MENU/OK to copy the current picture.
Copy all pictures.
O • Copying ends when the destination is full.
• If you attempt to copy a file over 4 GB in size to a memory card with
a capacity of 32 GB or less, copying will end and the file will not be
copied.
233
Playback and the Playback Menu
3
4
7
TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE
Select photos for upload to a paired smartphone or tablet via
Bluetooth.
N For information on pairing the camera with a smartphone or tablet, visit:
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/x-h2_connection/
1
Select TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE > SELECT IMAGE &
TRANSFER.
N Select RESET to remove “upload to smartphone” marking from all
pictures before proceeding.
Playback and the Playback Menu
2
7
3
Mark pictures for upload.
Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK
to mark them for upload.
• To switch to the memory card in the
other slot or display only pictures
that meet selected criteria, press
DISP/BACK before marking begins.
• To select all pictures, press the Q button.
• Selecting any two pictures with the
AEL button also selects all pictures
between them.
Press DISP/BACK and select START
TRANSFER.
The selected pictures will be uploaded.
234
SELECT IMAGE
FRAME
SELECT ALL
SELECT RANGE
SELECT
FINISH/SETTING
SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
START TRANSFER
FILTERING
SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT
FINISH IMAGE SELECT AND
START TRANSFER
The Playback Menu
Filtering Pictures/Choosing a Slot
To switch to the memory card in the other slot or display only pictures that
meet selected criteria, press DISP/BACK in the picture-selection dialog.
• To display only pictures that meet selected cri- SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
teria, choose FILTERING.
START TRANSFER
FILTERING
• To switch to the memory card in the other slot,
SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT
choose SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT.
FILTERING THE IMAGE
WITH CONDITIONS
O Switching slots or changing the filter criteria removes any existing upN • Image transfer orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures.
• The following cannot be selected for upload:
- Protected pictures
- Movies
- RAW images
- “Gift” pictures (pictures taken with other cameras)
• If ON is selected for both IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
and Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > Bluetooth ON/OFF in
the network/USB settings menu, upload to the paired device will
continue even while the camera is off.
• When a SMARTPHONE TRANSFER ORDER is selected for D BUTTON/
DIAL SETTING > a ISO BUTTON SETTING, the picture-selection dialog can be displayed by pressing the ISO button.
235
Playback and the Playback Menu
load marking.
7
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
Connect to smartphones running the latest apps. The smartphone
can then be used to:
• Control the camera and take pictures remotely
• Receive pictures uploaded from the camera
• Browse the pictures on the camera and download selected pictures
• Upload location data to the camera
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
N • For downloads and other information, visit:
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/
• If r WIRELESS COMMUNICATION is selected
for D BUTTON/
DIAL SETTING > a ISO BUTTON SETTING, you can connect to the
smartphone using the ISO button.
SLIDE SHOW
View pictures in an automated slide show. Press MENU/OK to start
and press the focus stick (focus lever) right or left to skip ahead
or back. Press DISP/BACK at any time during the show to view onscreen help. The show can be ended at any time by pressing
MENU/OK.
N The camera will not turn off automatically while a slide show is in progress.
236
The Playback Menu
PHOTOBOOK ASSIST
Create books from your favorite photos.
Creating a Photobook
1 Select NEW BOOK for C PLAY BACK MENU > PHOTOBOOK
ASSIST.
2
Scroll through the images and press the focus stick (focus lever) up to select or deselect. Press MENU/OK to exit when the
book is complete.
cus stick down to select the current image for the cover instead.
3
Highlight COMPLETE PHOTOBOOK and press MENU/OK (to select all photos for the book, choose SELECT ALL). The new
book will be added to the list in the photobook assist menu.
N • Books can contain up to 300 pictures.
• Books that contain no photos are automatically deleted.
Playback and the Playback Menu
N • Neither photographs a or smaller nor movies can be selected
for photobooks.
• The first picture selected becomes the cover image. Press the fo-
7
237
Viewing Photobooks
Highlight a book in the photobook assist menu and press MENU/OK
to display the book, then press the focus stick (focus lever) left or
right to scroll through the pictures.
Playback and the Playback Menu
Editing and Deleting Photobooks
Display the photobook and press MENU/OK. The following options
will be displayed; select the desired option and follow the onscreen instructions.
• EDIT: Edit the book as described in “Creating a Photobook”.
• ERASE: Delete the book.
7
238
The Playback Menu
PRINT ORDER (DPOF)
Create a digital “print order” for DPOF-compatible printers.
1
2
Select C PLAY BACK MENU > PRINT ORDER (DPOF).
3
Display a picture you wish to include in or remove from the
print order.
4
Press the focus stick (focus lever) up
or down to choose the number of
copies (up to 99).
Select WITH DATE s to print the date of recording on pictures, WITHOUT DATE to print pictures without dates, or
RESET ALL to remove all pictures from the print order before
proceeding.
press the focus stick down until the
number of copies is 0.
01 SHEETS
FRAME
SET
Total number
of prints
Number of copies
7
N Repeat steps 3–4 to complete the print order.
5
Playback and the Playback Menu
N To remove a picture from the order,
PRINT ORDER (DPOF)
DPOF: 00001
The total number of prints is displayed in the monitor. Press
MENU/OK to exit.
N • The pictures in the current print order are indicated by a u icon
during playback.
• Print orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures from a single
memory card.
• If a memory card is inserted containing a print order created by an-
other camera, you will need to delete the order before creating as
described above.
239
instax PRINTER PRINT
To print pictures to optional Fujifilm instax SHARE printers, first
select instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING in the network/
USB settings menu and enter the instax SHARE printer name
(SSID) and password, then follow the steps below.
1
2
Playback and the Playback Menu
7
Turn the printer on.
Select C PLAY BACK MENU > instax
PRINTER PRINT. The camera will connect to the printer.
PRINTER PRINT
instax-12345678
CONNECTING
FUJIFILM-CAMERA-1234
CANCEL
3
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to
display the picture you want to print,
then press MENU/OK. The picture will
be sent to the printer and printing
will start.
PRINTER PRINT
100-0020
SET
instax-12345678
CANCEL
N • Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be printed.
• The area printed is smaller than the area visible in the LCD
monitor.
• The displays may vary depending on the printer connected.
240
The Playback Menu
DISP ASPECT
Choose the aspect ratio used for the display of still pictures on
High Definition (HD) devices (this option is available only when
an HDMI cable is connected).
Options
3:2
N Choose 16 : 9 to display photos with an aspect ratio of 3 : 2 full screen.
The pictures will be displayed full screen with tops and bottoms
cropped out.
Playback and the Playback Menu
16 : 9
7
241
MEMO
242
Network/USB Setting Menus
243
Network/USB Setting Menus
Adjust camera network and USB settings.
For more information on the network/USB settings menu, visit:
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/x-h2_connection/
Network/USB Setting Menus
8
244
The Setup Menus
245
USER SETTING
Adjust basic camera settings.
To access basic camera settings, press
MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and
choose USER SETTING.
USER SETTING
FORMAT
bAREA SETTING
DATE/TIME
TIME DIFFERENCE
a
x MY MENU SETTING
F MY MENU SETTING
SENSOR CLEANING
EXIT
FORMAT
To format a memory card:
The Setup Menus
9
1
2
Select D USER SETTING > FORMAT in the D (SET UP) tab.
3
A confirmation dialog will be displayed. To format the memory card,
highlight OK and press MENU/OK.
Highlight the slot containing the card you wish to format and
press MENU/OK.
N To exit without formatting the memory
FORMAT
FORMAT CARD IN SLOT 1, OK?
ERASE ALL DATA
OK
CANCEL
card, select CANCEL or press DISP/BACK.
O • All data—including protected pictures—will be deleted from the
memory card. Be sure important files have been copied to a computer or other storage device.
• Do not open the battery-chamber cover during formatting.
N Format options can also be displayed by holding the selector down
(f) while pressing the b (delete) button.
246
USER SETTING
b AREA SETTING
Adjust settings for your current time zone.
AREA SETTING
Choose your time zone from a map.
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
Turn daylight saving time on or off.
Option
ON
OFF
Description
Daylight saving time on.
Daylight saving time off.
DATE/TIME
To set the camera clock:
Select D USER SETTING > DATE/TIME in the D (SET UP) tab.
3
Press MENU/OK to set the clock.
Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to highlight the
year, month, day, hour, or minute and press up or down to
change. To change the order in which the year, month, and
day are displayed, highlight the date format and press the
focus stick up or down.
The Setup Menus
1
2
9
247
TIME DIFFERENCE
Switch the camera clock instantly from your home time zone to
the local time at your destination when traveling. To specify the
difference between your local and home time zone:
O Use b AREA SETTING to choose your home time zone before selecting a local time zone using g LOCAL.
1
2
Highlight g LOCAL and press MENU/OK.
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose the local time
zone. Press MENU/OK when settings are complete.
N Select ON to enable daylight saving time.
To set the camera clock to local time, highlight g LOCAL and
press MENU/OK. To set the clock to the time in your home time
zone, select h HOME.
Options
g LOCAL
h HOME
The Setup Menus
N If g LOCAL is selected, g will be displayed in yellow for about three
seconds when the camera is turned on.
9
248
USER SETTING
Qa
Choose a language.
x MY MENU SETTING
Edit the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab, a personalized custom menu of frequently-used photo menu options (P 289).
F MY MENU SETTING
Edit the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab, a personalized custom menu of frequently-used movie menu options (P 289).
The Setup Menus
9
249
SENSOR CLEANING
Remove dust from the camera image sensor.
Option
OK
Description
Clean the sensor immediately.
Sensor cleaning will be performed when the camera is
WHEN SWITCHED ON
turned on.
Sensor cleaning will be performed when the camera turns
WHEN SWITCHED OFF off (sensor cleaning is not however performed if the camera turns off in playback mode).
N Dust that cannot be removed using sensor cleaning can be removed
using a blower (P 358).
BATTERY AGE
Check battery age. Age is expressed as a
number between 0 and 4. The higher the
number, the older the battery.
BATTERY AGE
The Setup Menus
N The older the battery, the faster it loses its charge. We recommend that
batteries be replaced as they wear out.
9
250
USER SETTING
RESET
Reset shooting or setup menu options to default values.
1
Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK.
Option
Description
Reset all photo menu settings other than custom white
STILL MENU RESET balance and custom settings banks created using
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING to default values.
Reset all movie menu settings other than custom white
MOVIE MENU RESET balance and custom settings banks created using
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING to default values.
Reset all setup menu settings other than DATE/TIME,
SET-UP RESET b AREA SETTING, TIME DIFFERENCE, and
COPYRIGHT INFO to default values.
Reset all settings other than custom white balance to
INITIALIZE
default values.
2
A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight OK and
press MENU/OK.
The Setup Menus
REGULATORY
To view electronic copies of the product model number, and
other certificates, select D USER SETTING > REGULATORY in the
setup menu.
9
251
SOUND SETTING
Make changes to camera sounds.
To access sound settings, press MENU/OK,
select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose
SOUND SET-UP.
SOUND SETTING
AF BEEP VOL.
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL.
OPERATION VOL.
ttELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
ttELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
sELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
sELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
PLAYBACK VOLUME
EXIT
AF BEEP VOL.
Choose the volume of the beep that sounds when the camera
focuses. The beep can be muted by selecting eOFF.
Options
b (high)
c (medium)
d (low)
eOFF (mute)
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL.
Choose the volume of the beep that sounds while the self-timer
is active. The beep can be muted by selecting eOFF.
The Setup Menus
Options
b (high)
9
252
c (medium)
d (low)
eOFF (mute)
SOUND SETTING
OPERATION VOL.
Adjust the volume of the sounds produced when camera controls are operated. Choose eOFF to disable control sounds.
Options
b (high)
c (medium)
d (low)
eOFF (mute)
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
Adjust the volume of the sounds produced by the mechanical or
electronic front-curtain shutter.
Options
b (high)
c (medium)
d (low)
eOFF (mute)
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
Choose the sound made by the mechanical or electronic
front-curtain shutter.
i SOUND 1
Options
j SOUND 2
k SOUND 3
The Setup Menus
9
253
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
Adjust the volume of the sounds produced by the electronic
shutter. Choose eOFF to disable the shutter sound.
Options
b (high)
c (medium)
d (low)
eOFF (mute)
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
Choose the sound made by the electronic shutter.
Options
j SOUND 2
i SOUND 1
k SOUND 3
PLAYBACK VOLUME
Adjust the volume for movie playback.
0
The Setup Menus
9
254
1
2
3
4
Options
5
6
7
8
9
10
SOUND SETTING
4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK
Adjust audio settings for use when viewing 4ch movies.
Option
Description
XLR
The camera plays audio recorded via external microphones connected via the XLR microphone adapter.
CAMERA
The camera plays audio recorded via the camera’s built-in
microphone or external microphones connected via the
microphone jack.
N You can also switch sources while viewing the playback display by
pressing the center of the focus stick (focus lever).
The Setup Menus
9
255
SCREEN SETTING
Make changes to display settings.
To access display settings, press MENU/OK,
select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose
SCREEN SET-UP.
SCREEN SETTING
VIEW MODE SETTING
EVF BRIGHTNESS
EVF COLOR
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT
LCD BRIGHTNESS
LCD COLOR
LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT
IMAGE DISP.
EXIT
VIEW MODE SETTING
Adjust settings for eye sensor, EVF (electronic viewfinder), or LCD
monitor view modes (P 18).
EVF BRIGHTNESS
Adjust the brightness of the display in the electronic viewfinder.
Option
AUTO
The Setup Menus
9
MANUAL
Description
The camera automatically adjusts brightness around a selected
level in response to changes in ambient lighting conditions.
Adjust brightness manually; choose from options between −7
and +5.
EVF COLOR
Adjust the saturation of the display in the electronic viewfinder.
−5
256
−4
−3
−2
−1
Options
0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
SCREEN SETTING
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the color of the display in the electronic viewfinder.
1
Adjust colors using the focus stick
(focus lever).
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT
SET
2
CANCEL
Press MENU/OK.
The Setup Menus
9
257
LCD BRIGHTNESS
Adjust monitor brightness.
−5
−4
−3
−2
−1
Options
0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Options
0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
LCD COLOR
Adjust monitor saturation.
−5
−4
−3
−2
−1
LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the color of the display in the LCD monitor.
1
2
Adjust colors using the focus stick (focus lever).
Press MENU/OK.
The Setup Menus
9
258
SCREEN SETTING
IMAGE DISP.
Choose how long images are displayed after shooting.
Option
CONTINUOUS
1.5 SEC
0.5 SEC
OFF
Description
Pictures are displayed until the MENU/OK button is pressed or the
shutter button is pressed halfway. To zoom in on the active focus
point, press the center of the focus stick (focus lever); press again
to cancel zoom.
Pictures are displayed for the selected time or until the shutter
button is pressed halfway.
Pictures are not displayed after shooting.
N • Colors may differ slightly from those in the final image.
• “Noise” mottling may be visible at high sensitivities.
AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS
Choose whether the indicators in the viewfinder and LCD monitor
rotate to match camera orientation.
Options
ON
OFF
The Setup Menus
9
259
PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE
Choose whether to enable exposure and/or white balance preview
in manual exposure mode.
Option
Description
PREVIEW EXP./WB Enable exposure and white balance preview.
Preview white balance only. Choose this option in situations in
PREVIEW WB which exposure is likely to change during shooting, as may be
the case when you use a flash during daylight.
Disable exposure and white balance preview. Choose this option in situations in which both exposure and white balance
OFF
are likely to change during shooting, as may be the case when
you use a flash with an incandescent monitoring lamp.
NATURAL LIVE VIEW
Choose whether the effects of film simulation, white balance,
and other settings are visible in the monitor.
Option
The Setup Menus
ON
OFF
9
260
Description
The effects of camera settings are not visible in the monitor,
but shadows in low-contrast, back-lit scenes and other hardto-see subjects more visible. Colors and tone will differ from
those in the final picture. The display will however be adjusted
to show the effects of monochrome and sepia settings.
The effects of film simulation, white balance, and other settings
can be previewed in the monitor.
SCREEN SETTING
F-Log VIEW ASSIST
Select ON to display a tone-corrected preview (equivalent to
BT.709) when recording or viewing F-log movies.
Options
ON
OFF
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING
Adjust settings for use when taking pictures using the virtual
horizon display (P 25).
The Setup Menus
9
261
FRAMING GUIDELINE
Choose a framing grid for shooting mode.
Option
G GRID 24
F GRID 9
Display
P
For “rule of thirds” composition.
P
H HD FRAMING
P
A six-by-four grid.
Frame HD pictures in the
crop shown by the lines at
the top and bottom of the
display.
N Framing guides are not shown at default settings but can be displayed
using D SCREEN SET-UP > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING (P 23).
The Setup Menus
9
262
SCREEN SETTING
AUTOROTATE PB
Choose ON to automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation)
pictures during playback.
Options
ON
OFF
FOCUS SCALE UNITS
Choose the units used for the focus distance indicator.
Options
METERS
FEET
APERTURE UNIT FOR CINEMA LENS
Choose whether the camera displays aperture as a T-number
(used for movie camera lenses) or an f/-number (used for still
camera lenses) when an optional FUJINON MKX-series lens is
attached. For information on using cinema lenses, see the documentation provided with the lens.
Option
F NUMBER
263
The Setup Menus
T NUMBER
Description
A measure of lens aperture commonly used by cinematographers. Lens transmittance is taken into account to better calculate exposure.
A measure of lens aperture commonly used by photographers.
Lens transmittance is assumed to be 100%, meaning that the
same aperture may produce different exposures depending on
the lens.
9
DUAL DISPLAY SETTING
Choose the content of the two windows in the dual display.
Option
Description
The right (small) window shows a close-up of the focus area,
R:FOCUS L:FRAME
while the left (large) window shows the entire frame.
The right (small) window shows the entire frame, while the left
R:FRAME L:FOCUS
(large) window shows a close-up of the focus area.
DISP. CUSTOM SETTING
Choose the items shown in the standard indicator display
(P 23).
The Setup Menus
9
264
SCREEN SETTING
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF)
Select ON to display large indicators in the electronic viewfinder. The indicators displayed can be selected using D SCREEN
SET-UP > LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING.
OFF
ON
O Some
icons are not displayed when ON is selected for LARGE
INDICATORS MODE(EVF) (P 15).
N If LARGE INDICATORS MODE is assigned to a function button, the
button can be used to toggle LARGE INDICATORS MODE on (ON)
and off (OFF) (P 297).
The Setup Menus
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD)
Select ON to display large indicators in the LCD monitor. The indicators displayed can be selected using D SCREEN SET-UP >
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING.
9
OFF
ON
O Some
icons are not displayed when ON is selected for LARGE
INDICATORS MODE(LCD) (P 17).
N If LARGE INDICATORS MODE is assigned to a function button, the
button can be used to toggle LARGE INDICATORS MODE on (ON)
and off (OFF) (P 297).
265
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING
Choose the indicators displayed when
ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP >
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) or
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD).
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING
Expo. DISP.
Scale
L1
L2
L3
L4
R1
R2
Option
A Expo. DISP.
B d Scale
C L1, L2, L3, L4
D R1, R2, R3, R4
Description
Choose the items listed at the bottom of the display.
Selected items are indicated by check marks (R); to
deselect, highlight the check marks and press MENU/OK.
Select ON to display the exposure indicator.
Choose up to four large icons for display on the left side
of the screen.
Choose up to four large icons for display on the right
side of the screen.
INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ.
Adjust display contrast.
The Setup Menus
Option
HIGH CONTRAST
STANDARD
LOW CONTRAST
DARK AMBIENT LIGHTING
9
266
Description
High contrast.
Normal contrast.
Low contrast.
Contrast adjusted for dim ambient lighting.
SCREEN SETTING
LOCATION INFO
Select ON to display location info downloaded from a smartphone.
Options
ON
OFF
SUB MONITOR SETTING
Choose the indicators displayed in the secondary LCD monitor.
Separate displays are available for still photography and movie
recording.
1
Select D SCREEN SET-UP > SUB MONITOR SETTING in the
setup menu.
2
3
Highlight STILL MODE or MOVIE MODE and press MENU/OK.
Highlight the indicator you wish to change and press MENU/OK.
SUB MONITOR SETTING(STILL)
SHUTTER SPEED
APERTURE
EXPO. COMP.
The Setup Menus
ISO
SHOOTING MODE
IMAGE SIZE
WHITE BALANCE
FILM SIMULATION
9
267
4
Highlight the indicator you wish to
display and press MENU/OK.
Choose from:
• SHUTTER SPEED
• APERTURE
• EXPO. COMP.
• ISO
• MOVIE MODE
• FRAMES REM.
• REC. TIME
• SHOOTING MODE
• PHOTOMETRY
• DRIVE MODE
• FOCUS MODE
5
DISPLAY 1 SETTING
SHUTTER SPEED
APERTURE
EXPO. COMP.
ISO
MOVIE MODE
FRAMES REM.
REC. TIME
NONE
• WHITE BALANCE
• IMAGE SIZE
• IMAGE QUALITY
• BATTERY LEVEL
• CARD SLOT OPTIONS
• SHUTTER TYPE
• FILM SIMULATION
• DYNAMIC RANGE
• CONNECTION STATUS
• NONE
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to change additional indicators.
The Setup Menus
SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND COLOR
Adjusting the background color of the secondary LCD monitor
according to lighting conditions makes the display easier to read.
Option
BLACK
WHITE
9
Description
Recommended for use with dark ambient lighting.
Recommended for use with bright ambient lighting.
N The background is displayed in white when the secondary LCD monitor backlight is on.
268
SCREEN SETTING
x Q MENU BACKGROUND
Choose the background color used for the quick menu when it is
displayed during still photography.
Options
TRANSPARENT
BLACK
F Q MENU BACKGROUND
Choose the background color used for the quick menu when it is
displayed during movie recording.
Options
TRANSPARENT
BLACK
The Setup Menus
9
269
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
Access options for camera controls.
To access control options, press MENU/OK,
select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING.
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
FOCUS LEVER SETTING
EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
POWER ZOOM LENS FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
SELECTOR BUTTON SETTING
COMMAND DIAL SETTING
o S.S OPERATION
EXIT
FOCUS LEVER SETTING
Choose the functions performed by pressing the center of the
focus stick (focus lever) or by pressing the stick up, down, left, or
right.
PUSH
Option
OFF
The Setup Menus
9
Description
Pressing the center of the stick has no effect.
Press the center of the stick to choose the focus area size.
If g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING or SUBJECT
EDIT FOCUS AREA
DETECTION SETTING is on, you can instead position the
focus frame over the desired face, eye, animal, or object.
Press the center of the stick to zoom in on the active focus
ZOOM
area (P 99).
RESET TO CENTER Press the center of the stick to select the center focus area.
TILT o
Option
OFF
DIRECT AF POINT
SELECTION
EDIT FOCUS AREA
270
Description
Pressing the stick up, down, left, or right has no effect.
Choose the focus area without leaving the shooting display.
Press the stick up, down, left, or right to view a focus-area
display and choose the focus area.
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
Choose the items displayed in the quick menu during still photography (P 291).
F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
Choose the items displayed in the quick menu when filming
movies (P 291).
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
Choose the roles played by the function buttons (P 297).
POWER ZOOM LENS FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
Choose the roles played by the function buttons available on
some power zoom lenses (P 306).
SELECTOR BUTTON SETTING
Choose the roles played by the up, down, left, and right buttons
on the selector.
Description
The selector buttons serve as function buttons.
The selector buttons can be used to position the focus area.
N Selecting FOCUS AREA prevents you accessing the functions assigned
to the function buttons.
The Setup Menus
Option
Fn BUTTON
FOCUS AREA
9
271
COMMAND DIAL SETTING
Choose whether to reverse the roles played by the front and rear
command dials in each of the following modes.
Option
P
S
A
M
Description
Reverse the dials used for program shift and exposure compensation in mode P (program AE).
Reverse the dials used for shutter-speed selection and exposure
compensation in mode S (shutter-priority AE).
Reverse the dials used for aperture selection and exposure
compensation in mode A (aperture-priority AE).
Reverse the dials used for shutter-speed and aperture selection
in mode M (manual).
o S.S OPERATION
Select OFF to disable shutter-speed fine-tuning using the command dials.
Options
ON
The Setup Menus
9
OFF
COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION
Choose the direction in which the command dials are rotated to
choose values. Settings for the front and rear command dials can
be adjusted separately.
Option
- ––––– +
+ ––––– -
272
Description
Rotate the dial right for higher values or to move to the next
item.
Rotate the dial left for higher values or to move to the next item.
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
SHUTTER AF
Choose whether the camera focuses when the shutter button is
pressed halfway.
Option
Description
AF-S
• ON: Focus locks when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
• OFF: No focus operation is performed when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
• ON: The camera focuses while the shutter button is pressed
AF-C
halfway.
• OFF: No focus operation is performed when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
SHUTTER AE
If ON is selected, exposure will lock while the shutter button is
pressed halfway. The setting for focus mode CONTINUOUS AF
(AF-C) can be adjusted separately from that for modes SINGLE
AF (AF-S) and MANUAL FOCUS.
Options
ON
OFF
taken in burst mode.
SHOOT WITHOUT LENS
Choose ON to enable the shutter release when no lens is attached.
Options
ON
OFF
273
The Setup Menus
N Select OFF to allow the camera to adjust exposure before each shot
9
SHOOT WITHOUT CARD
Choose whether the shutter can be released without a memory
card inserted in the camera.
Option
ON
OFF
Description
When no memory card is inserted, the shutter can be released to
test camera function and the shooting and setup menus can be
displayed.
The shutter is disabled if no memory card is inserted, preventing
accidental loss of pictures taken without a memory card.
LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING
Adjust settings for compatible lenses with focus rings or power zoom.
FOCUS RING ROTATE
Choose the direction in which the focus ring is rotated to increase the focus distance.
Options
X CW (clockwise)
The Setup Menus
9
Y CCW (counterclockwise)
FOCUS RING OPERATION
Choose how the camera adjusts focus in response to the movement of the focus ring.
Option
Description
NONLINEAR Focus is adjusted at the same rate as the ring is rotated.
Focus is adjusted linearly according to the amount the ring is rotated,
LINEAR
but the focusing speed is unaffected by the speed the ring is rotated.
F CONSTANT SPEED FOCUS (Fn)
Choose the rate at which the focus distance changes when adjusted using function buttons during manual focus with compatible
power zoom lenses. The higher the number, the higher the rate.
Options
1(SLOW)
274
2
3
4
5
6
7
8(FAST)
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (Fn)
Choose the rate at which compatible power zoom lenses can be
zoomed in or out using function buttons. The higher the number, the
higher the rate.
Options
1(SLOW)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8(FAST)
CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM/FOCUS (Fn) OPERATION
Choose whether the function buttons on compatible power
zoom lenses need only be pressed once to start and stop power
focus or power zoom.
Option
START/STOP
SWITCH
ACTIVE WHILE
PRESSING
Description
The operation starts when the button is pressed and stops when
it is pressed a second time.
The operation continues while the button is pressed and stops
when the button is released.
Options
X CW (clockwise)
Y CCW (counterclockwise)
ZOOM/FOCUS CONTROL RING
Choose role played by the zoom/focus control ring on compatible power zoom lenses.
Options
ZOOM
FOCUS
275
The Setup Menus
ZOOM RING ROTATE
Choose whether to reverse the rotation of the zoom ring on compatible power zoom lenses.
9
AE/AF-LOCK MODE
This option determines the behavior of the button to which
exposure and/or focus lock is assigned.
Option
Description
AE&AF ON WHEN
Exposure and/or focus will lock while the button is pressed.
PRESSING
AE&AF ON/OFF Exposure and/or focus will lock when the button is pressed and remain locked until it is pressed again.
SWITCH
AWB-LOCK MODE
Choose the behavior of function buttons assigned auto white balance
(AWB) lock. Auto white balance lock is used to lock white balance at
the value metered by the camera when WA WHITE PRIORITY, AUTO,
or AA AMBIENCE PRIORITY is selected for white balance.
Option
Description
AWB ON WHEN
Auto white balance locks while the button is pressed.
PRESSING
AWB ON/OFF Press the button once to lock auto white balance and again to end
the lock.
SWITCH
The Setup Menus
9
276
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
a ISO BUTTON SETTING
Choose the role performed by the ISO button during playback.
Option
Description
Pressing the button displays a dialog where pictures can be
selected for upload to a smartphone with which the camera
a SMARTPHONE
is paired (P 234). If the camera is not currently paired with
TRANSFER ORDER
a smartphone, Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING options
will be displayed instead.
Pressing the button marks the current picture for upload to an
b FTP
TRANSFER ORDER FTP server.
Pressing the button marks the current picture for priority upload
c FTP PRIORITY
to an FTP server. The picture will be moved to the head of the
TRANSFER ORDER
upload queue.
r WIRELESS
The button can be used for wireless connections.
COMMUNICATION
N b FTP TRANSFER ORDER and c FTP PRIORITY TRANSFER ORDER
can only be used when an optional FT-XH file transmitter is connected.
The Setup Menus
9
277
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
Enable or disable touch-screen controls.
x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
Option
ON
OFF
Description
The LCD monitor functions as a touch screen during shooting.
Touch controls disabled.
x DOUBLE TAP SETTING
Option
ON
OFF
Description
Tap the LCD monitor twice to zoom in on your subject during
shooting.
Touch zoom disabled.
c TOUCH FUNCTION
Option
ON
OFF
Description
Enable touch-function gestures.
Disable touch-function gestures.
The Setup Menus
TOUCH ZOOM
Option
ON
OFF
9
278
Description
If the lens supports touch zoom, you can zoom in and out by
touching the LCD monitor (P 35).
Touch zoom disabled.
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
a TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
Option
ON
OFF
Description
The LCD monitor functions as a touch screen during playback.
Touch controls disabled.
EVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS
Select the area of the LCD monitor used for touch controls while
the viewfinder is active. The area used for touch controls can be
selected from:
Option
6
0
2
4
1
3
5
OFF
Description
All.
Right half.
Top right quarter.
Bottom right quarter.
Left half.
Top left quarter.
Bottom left quarter.
Touch controls disabled.
The Setup Menus
9
279
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
LOCK
Lock selected controls to prevent unintended operation.
Option
Description
Choose from the following:
• UNLOCK: Reset lock options.
ALL FUNCTION: Lock all controls in the FUNCTION
LOCK SETTING •
SELECTION list.
• SELECTED FUNCTION: Lock only the controls selected in
the FUNCTION SELECTION list.
FUNCTION
SELECTION
Choose the controls locked when SELECTED FUNCTION is
chosen for LOCK SETTING.
N The controls selected using SELECTED FUNCTION can be locked at any
time during shooting by pressing and holding MENU/OK. To unlock the
controls, press and hold the button again.
The Setup Menus
9
280
POWER MANAGEMENT
Adjust power management settings.
To access power management settings,
press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab,
and choose POWER MANAGEMENT.
POWER MANAGEMENT
AUTO POWER OFF
PERFORMANCE
EVF/LCD BOOST SETTING
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.
EXIT
AUTO POWER OFF
Choose the length of time before the camera turns off automatically when no operations are performed. Shorter times increase
battery life; if OFF is selected, the camera must be turned off
manually.
Options
5 MIN
2 MIN
1 MIN
30 SEC
15 SEC
OFF
Option
BOOST
NORMAL
ECONOMY
Description
Boost camera focus and viewfinder display performance.
The battery drains faster than when is NORMAL selected.
Choose for standard focus and viewfinder display performance and battery endurance.
Limit autofocus and viewfinder performance. This option
offers better battery endurance than does NORMAL.
281
The Setup Menus
PERFORMANCE
Select BOOST to improve focus and viewfinder display performance.
9
POWER MANAGEMENT
EVF/LCD BOOST SETTING
Adjust the behavior of the EVF and LCD monitor when BOOST is
selected for PERFORMANCE.
Option
EVF/LCD LOW LIGHT
PRIORITY
EVF/LCD RESOLUTION
PRIORITY
EVF FRAME RATE
PRIORITY (120P)
Description
Display brightness is adjusted to make subjects in shadows easier to see. Motion blur may cause ghosting.
Display resolution is increased to make details easier to
see.
The refresh rate for the EVF is increased, smoothing motion.
The refresh rate for the EVF is increased beyond EVF
EVF FRAME RATE
FRAME RATE PRIORITY (120P) smoothing motion
PRIORITY (240P EQUIV.)
still further. The EVF may darken.
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.
If its temperature rises beyond a certain point, the camera will first
display a message and then, if the temperature rise continues, automatically end shooting and power down. Choose the temperature
at which the camera turns off automatically.
The Setup Menus
Option
STANDARD
9
HIGH
282
Description
The camera turns off automatically when its temperature
reaches the STANDARD value.
Shooting can continue at temperatures higher than
the STANDARD value, extending the time available to
record movies and the like. Because remaining in contact
with the camera at these high temperatures could result
in low-temperature burns, this option should only be
used after mounting the camera on a tripod or taking
other steps to avoid prolonged contact with the camera.
SAVE DATA SETTING
Make changes to file management settings.
To access file management settings,
press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab,
and choose SAVE DATA SET-UP.
SAVE DATA SETTING
FRAME NO.
EDIT FILE NAME
xCARD SLOT SETTING
SELECT SLOT(x SEQUENTIAL)
SELECT FOLDER
COPYRIGHT INFO
DEFAULT CAPTION
GEOTAGGING
EXIT
FRAME NO.
Frame number
New pictures are stored in image files named
using a four-digit file number assigned by
adding one to the last file number used. The
File
file number is displayed during playback as Directory
number number
shown. FRAME NO. controls whether file numbering is reset to 0001 when a new memory card is inserted or
the current memory card is formatted.
Option
RENEW
N • If the frame number reaches 999-9999, the shutter release will be
disabled. Turn the camera off and insert a formatted memory card
before resuming shooting.
• Selecting D USER SETTING > RESET sets FRAME NO. to
CONTINUOUS but does not reset the file number.
• Frame numbers for pictures taken with other cameras may differ.
283
The Setup Menus
CONTINUOUS
Description
Numbering continues from the last file number used or the first
available file number, whichever is higher. Choose this option to
reduce the number of pictures with duplicate file names.
Numbering is reset to 0001 after formatting or when a new
memory card is inserted.
9
EDIT FILE NAME
Change the file name prefix. sRGB images use a four-letter prefix
(default “DSCF”), Adobe RGB images a three-letter prefix (“DSF”)
preceded by an underscore.
Option
sRGB
AdobeRGB
Default prefix
DSCF
_DSF
Sample file name
ABCD0001
_ABC0001
x CARD SLOT SETTING
Choose the role played by the card in the second slot.
Option
SEQUENTIAL
BACKUP
SEPARATE
Description
The card in the second slot is used only when the card in the
first slot is full.
Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card.
RAW pictures will be saved to the card in the first slot and JPEG
or HEIF pictures to the card in the second slot. This option only
takes effect when FINE+RAW or NORMAL+RAW is selected
for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > IMAGE QUALITY.
The Setup Menus
SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL)
Choose the card that is recorded to first when SEQUENTIAL is
selected for x CARD SLOT SETTING.
Options
SLOT 1
9
284
SLOT 2
SAVE DATA SETTING
SELECT FOLDER
Create folders and choose the folder used to store subsequent
pictures.
Option
SELECT FOLDER
CREATE FOLDER
Description
To choose the folder in which subsequent pictures will be
stored, press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to
highlight an existing folder and press MENU/OK.
Enter a five-character folder name. The new folder will be
created with the next picture you take and subsequent
pictures will be stored in that folder.
COPYRIGHT INFO
Copyright information, in the form of Exif tags, can be added to
new images as they are taken. Changes to copyright information
are reflected only in images taken after the changes are made.
The Setup Menus
Option
Description
DISP COPYRIGHT INFO View the current copyright information.
ENTER AUTHOR’S INFO Enter the creator’s name.
ENTER COPYRIGHT INFO Enter the name of the copyright holder.
Delete the current copyright information. This change applies
DELETE COPYRIGHT INFO only to images taken after this option is selected; copyright
information recorded with existing images is not affected.
9
285
SAVE DATA SETTING
DEFAULT CAPTION
Choose the caption applied to new photos and movies.
DISPLAY
View the current caption.
EDIT
Enter a caption.
ERASE
Delete the current caption.
GEOTAGGING
If ON is selected, location data downloaded from a smartphone
will be embedded in pictures as they are taken.
Options
ON
The Setup Menus
9
286
OFF
Shortcuts
287
Shortcut Options
Customize camera controls to suit your style or situation.
Frequently-used options can be added to the Q menu or a custom “my” menu or assigned to a function button or touch-function gesture for direct access:
Shortcut Option
Description
Add frequently-used options to this custom menu,
“My menu”
which can be viewed by pressing MENU/OK and selecting the E (“MY MENU”) tab.
The Q menu is displayed by pressing the Q button.
The Quick Menu Use the Q menu to view or change the options selected for frequently-used menu items.
Use the function buttons for direct access to selectThe function buttons
ed features.
Use touch function button flick gestures (T-Fn1,
Touch-function
T-Fn2, T-Fn3, and T-Fn4) for direct access to selected
gestures
features.
Use the function buttons on the lens (if any) for diLens function buttons
rect access to selected features.
Shortcuts
10
288
P
289
291
297
303
306
MY MENU
Access a personalized menu of frequently-used options.
To display “my menu”, press MENU/OK in the
shooting display and select the E (MY
MENU) tab.
MY MENU
SELF-TIMER
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
FILM SIMULATION
GRAIN EFFECT
PHOTOMETRY
SHUTTER TYPE
IS MODE
gFACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
EXIT
O The E tab is only available if options have been assigned to
MY MENU.
MY MENU SETTING
To choose the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab:
1
In the setup menu, select D USER
SETTING > x MY MENU SETTING or
F MY MENU SETTING.
MY MENU SETTING
ADD ITEMS
RANK ITEMS
REMOVE ITEMS
N To reorder items, select RANK ITEMS.
To delete items, select REMOVE ITEMS.
2
MY MENU SETTING
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
FILM SIMULATION
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
SELECT
CANCEL
N Items currently in “my menu” are indicated by check marks.
Shortcuts
Press the focus stick (focus lever) up
or down to highlight ADD ITEMS and
press MENU/OK. Options that can be
added to “my menu” are highlighted
in blue.
10
289
MY MENU
3
Choose a position for the item and
press MENU/OK. The item will be added
to “my menu”.
SELECT ITEM LOCATION
1 IMAGE SIZE
2 IMAGE QUALITY
MOVE
4
5
SAVE
Press MENU/OK to return to the edit display.
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until all the desired items have been
added.
N “My menu” can contain up to 16 items.
Shortcuts
10
290
The Quick Menu
Use the quick menu for quick access to selected options. To
view the quick menu, press the Q button.
The Quick Menu Display
The quick menu offers different options in photo and movie
modes. At default settings, it contains the following items:
Still photography
SHOOTING MODE
SET
F IMAGE SIZE
G IMAGE QUALITY
H FILM SIMULATION
Default
I HIGHLIGHT TONE
J SHADOW TONE
K COLOR
L SHARPNESS
M SELF-TIMER
g FACE/EYE DETECTION
N
SETTING
O SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
P EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS
The quick menu shows the options currently selected for items
B–P, which can be changed.
291
Shortcuts
A SHOOTING MODE
B FOCUS MODE
C AF MODE
D DYNAMIC RANGE
E HIGH ISO NR
LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
10
Movie recording
SHOOTING MODE
SET
LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
Default
E APERTURE (MOVIE OPTIMIZED
CONTROL oL)
B SHUTTER SPEED
F F ISO
C MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/
G MOVIE MODE FRAME RATE
ASPECT RATIO
D F WHITE BALANCE
H F WHITE BALANCE COLOR
TEMP. (WHEN k SELECTED)
A SHOOTING MODE
The quick menu shows the options currently selected for items
B–H, which can be changed.
Shortcuts
10
292
The Quick Menu
Viewing and Changing Settings
1 Press Q to display the quick menu
during shooting.
2
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to
highlight items and rotate the rear
command dial to change.
SHOOTING MODE
SET
LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
N To jump to the x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING or F EDIT/
SAVE CUSTOM SETTING menu, press and hold the Q button
when the quick menu is displayed.
3
Press Q to exit when settings are complete.
can assign the Q button roles normally reserved for the function
buttons or assign the Q button’s default role to a function button
(P 297).
• To disable the Q (quick menu) button, select NONE for D BUTTON/
DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING > Q BUTTON SETTING.
293
Shortcuts
N • The quick menu can also be edited using touch controls.
• Using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING, you
10
Editing the Quick Menu
To choose the items displayed in the quick menu:
1
Press and hold the Q button during
shooting.
N The camera displays the photo quick menu during still photography and the movie quick menu when in movie mode.
2
The current quick menu will be displayed; use the focus stick
(focus lever) to highlight the item you wish to change and
press MENU/OK.
3
Highlight the item you wish to change and press MENU/OK.
The following can be assigned to the quick menu.
N The quick menus can also be edited using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING >
x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU or F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU.
Shortcuts
10
294
The Quick Menu
Available Items (Still Photography)
Choose from:
• IMAGE SIZE
• IMAGE QUALITY
• FILM SIMULATION
• GRAIN EFFECT
• COLOR CHROME EFFECT
• COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
• SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT
• DYNAMIC RANGE
• D RANGE PRIORITY
• WHITE BALANCE
• WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMP.
• SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
• MF ASSIST
• TOUCH SCREEN MODE
• SELF-TIMER
• PHOTOMETRY
• SHUTTER TYPE
• FLICKER REDUCTION
• ISO
• FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
• FLASH COMPENSATION
• MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/ASPECT
• HIGHLIGHT TONE
• SHADOW TONE
• COLOR
• SHARPNESS
• CLARITY
• HIGH ISO NR
• FOCUS MODE
• AF MODE
• AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
• g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
• MOVIE MODE FRAME RATE
• BIT RATE
• HIGH SPEED REC
• F IS MODE
• F IS MODE BOOST
• INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL
(WHEN k SELECTED)
RATIO
ADJUSTMENT
• EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS
• EVF/LCD COLOR
• NONE
N To disable the function button, choose NONE.
Shortcuts
10
295
The Quick Menu
Available Items (Movies)
• FILM SIMULATION
• DYNAMIC RANGE
• F WHITE BALANCE
• F WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMP.
(WHEN k SELECTED)
• HIGHLIGHT TONE
• SHADOW TONE
• COLOR
• SHARPNESS
• HIGH ISO NR
• g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
• SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
• MF ASSIST
• TOUCH SCREEN MODE
• PHOTOMETRY
• MOVIE ISO
• MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/ASPECT
• MOVIE MODE FRAME RATE
• BIT RATE
• HIGH SPEED REC
• FOCUS MODE
• MOVIE AF MODE
• FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
• F IS MODE
• F IS MODE BOOST
• SHUTTER SPEED
• APERTURE
(MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL)
• INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL
ADJUSTMENT
• EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS
• EVF/LCD COLOR
• NONE
RATIO
N To disable the function button, choose NONE.
Shortcuts
10
296
Function Controls
Assign a role to each function button or touch-function
gesture for quick access to the selected feature.
The Function Buttons
Assign a role to the function buttons for quick access to the selected feature.
Function Button Defaults
The default assignments are:
Back-of-Camera Function Buttons
Default
AF-ON
AE LOCK ONLY
QUICK MENU
Shortcuts
Function buttons
A AFON button
B AEL (exposure lock) button
C Q (quick menu) button
10
297
Front-of-Camera Function Buttons
Shortcuts
Function buttons
A ISO button
B VIEW MODE button
C WB button
D t (movie recording) button
E Fn1 button
F Fn2 button
G Fn3 button
10
298
Default
ISO
VIEW MODE SETTING
WHITE BALANCE
MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE
FACE DETECTION ON/OFF
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH
FOCUS MODE
Function Controls
The Selector
Function buttons
A Fn4 button
B Fn6 button
C Fn7 button
D Fn5 button
Default
PHOTOMETRY
x DIGITAL TELE-CONV./F DIGITAL
ZOOM
PERFORMANCE
FILM SIMULATION
Shortcuts
10
299
Assigning Roles to the Function Buttons
The roles played by the function buttons can be selected using
the D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING option in the setup menu.
Shortcuts
10
• d WHEN SET TO B (ON/OFF SWITCH)
• IMAGE SIZE
• IMAGE QUALITY
• RAW
• FILM SIMULATION
• GRAIN EFFECT
• COLOR CHROME EFFECT
• COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
• SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT
• DYNAMIC RANGE
• D RANGE PRIORITY
• WHITE BALANCE
• CLARITY
• RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING
• FOCUS AREA
• FOCUS CHECK
• FOCUS MODE
• AF MODE
• AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
• FACE DETECTION ON/OFF
• RIGHT/LEFT EYE SWITCH
• SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF
• AF RANGE LIMITER
• FOCUS CHECK LOCK
• SPORTS FINDER MODE
• PRE-SHOT sJ
• SELF-TIMER
• AE BKT SETTING
• FOCUS BKT SETTING
• PHOTOMETRY
• SHUTTER TYPE
300
• FLICKER REDUCTION
• FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
• ISO
• IS MODE
• x DIGITAL TELE-CONV./
F DIGITAL ZOOM
• WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
• FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
• TTL-LOCK
• MODELING FLASH
• MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE
• HIGH SPEED REC
• FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
• F IS MODE BOOST
• ZEBRA SETTING
• COOLING FAN SETTING
• INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL
ADJUSTMENT
• 4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK
• MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
• VIEW MODE SETTING
• EVF/LCD SWITCH
• PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD
• PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE
• NATURAL LIVE VIEW
• HISTOGRAM
• ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH
• LARGE INDICATORS MODE
• F-Log VIEW ASSIST
• COMMAND DIAL LOCK
Function Controls
• ZOOM/FOCUS CONTROL RING
• CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (T)
• CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (W)
• F CONSTANT SPEED FOCUS (N)
• F CONSTANT SPEED FOCUS (F)
• AE LOCK ONLY
• AF LOCK ONLY
• AE/AF LOCK
• AF-ON
• AWB LOCK ONLY
• LOCK SETTING
• PERFORMANCE
• AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
• Bluetooth ON/OFF
• QUICK MENU
• PLAYBACK
• NONE
N To disable the function button, choose NONE.
Shortcuts
10
301
AF-ON
Controls to which AF-ON is assigned can be used for autofocus.
MODELING FLASH
If MODELING FLASH is selected when a compatible shoe-mounted flash unit is attached, you can press the control to test-fire the
flash and check for shadows and the like (modeling flash).
TTL-LOCK
If TTL-LOCK is selected, you can press the control to lock flash
output according to the option selected for F FLASH SETTING >
TTL-LOCK MODE (P 178).
RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING
Controls to which RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING has been assigned can be pressed to temporarily recall the settings saved to
position C1 (CUSTOM 1) on the mode dial. Pressing the button a
second time restores the previous settings.
Shortcuts
10
302
Function Controls
Touch-Function Gestures
Assign roles to touch-function gestures (T-Fn1, T-Fn2, T-Fn3, or T-Fn4)
for quick access to selected features.
N Touch-function gestures are disabled by default. To enable touch-func-
tion gestures, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH
SCREEN SETTING > c TOUCH FUNCTION.
Touch-Function Gesture Defaults
The default assignments for the different gestures are:
Default
HISTOGRAM
PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD
LARGE INDICATORS MODE
ZEBRA SETTING
Shortcuts
Touch-Function Gestures
A T-Fn1 (flick up)
B T-Fn2 (flick left)
C T-Fn3 (flick right)
D T-Fn4 (flick down)
10
303
Assigning Roles to Touch-Function Gestures
The roles played by touch-function gestures can be selected using the D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
option in the setup menu.
Shortcuts
10
• IMAGE SIZE
• IMAGE QUALITY
• RAW
• FILM SIMULATION
• GRAIN EFFECT
• COLOR CHROME EFFECT
• COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
• SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT
• DYNAMIC RANGE
• D RANGE PRIORITY
• WHITE BALANCE
• CLARITY
• RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING
• FOCUS AREA
• FOCUS CHECK
• FOCUS MODE
• AF MODE
• AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
• FACE DETECTION ON/OFF
• RIGHT/LEFT EYE SWITCH
• SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF
• AF RANGE LIMITER
• FOCUS CHECK LOCK
• SPORTS FINDER MODE
• PRE-SHOT sJ
• SELF-TIMER
• AE BKT SETTING
• FOCUS BKT SETTING
• PHOTOMETRY
• SHUTTER TYPE
• FLICKER REDUCTION
• FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
304
• ISO
• IS MODE
• x DIGITAL TELE-CONV./
F DIGITAL ZOOM
• WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
• FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
• TTL-LOCK
• MODELING FLASH
• HIGH SPEED REC
• FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
• F IS MODE BOOST
• ZEBRA SETTING
• COOLING FAN SETTING
• INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL
ADJUSTMENT
• 4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK
• MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
• VIEW MODE SETTING
• EVF/LCD SWITCH
• PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD
• PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE
• NATURAL LIVE VIEW
• HISTOGRAM
• ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH
• LARGE INDICATORS MODE
• F-Log VIEW ASSIST
• COMMAND DIAL LOCK
• ZOOM/FOCUS CONTROL RING
• LOCK SETTING
• PERFORMANCE
• AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
Function Controls
• Bluetooth ON/OFF
• QUICK MENU
• PLAYBACK
• NONE
N To disable touch-function gestures, choose NONE.
Shortcuts
10
305
Lens Function Buttons
Choose the roles played by the function buttons on the lens
(where applicable).
Lens Function Button Defaults
The default assignments are:
N A XF18-120mmF4 LM PZ WR lens is used here for illustrative purposes.
Lens function button
Default
ZOOM/FOCUS CONTROL RING
A Z/F
CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (T)
B L-Fn1 (rocker zoom button pressed up)
C L-Fn2 (rocker zoom button pressed down) CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (W)
Shortcuts
10
306
Function Controls
Assigning Roles to the Lens Function Buttons
The roles played by the lens function buttons can be selected
using the D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > POWER ZOOM LENS
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING option in the setup menu.
• FLICKER REDUCTION
• FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
• ISO
• IS MODE
• x DIGITAL TELE-CONV./
F DIGITAL ZOOM
• WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
• FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
• TTL-LOCK
• MODELING FLASH
• MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE
• HIGH SPEED REC
• FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
• F IS MODE BOOST
• ZEBRA SETTING
• COOLING FAN SETTING
• INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL
ADJUSTMENT
• 4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK
• MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
• VIEW MODE SETTING
• EVF/LCD SWITCH
• PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD
• PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE
• NATURAL LIVE VIEW
• HISTOGRAM
• ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH
• LARGE INDICATORS MODE
• F-Log VIEW ASSIST
• COMMAND DIAL LOCK
307
Shortcuts
• d WHEN SET TO B (ON/OFF SWITCH)
• IMAGE SIZE
• IMAGE QUALITY
• RAW
• FILM SIMULATION
• GRAIN EFFECT
• COLOR CHROME EFFECT
• COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
• SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT
• DYNAMIC RANGE
• D RANGE PRIORITY
• WHITE BALANCE
• CLARITY
• RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING
• FOCUS AREA
• FOCUS CHECK
• FOCUS MODE
• AF MODE
• AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
• FACE DETECTION ON/OFF
• RIGHT/LEFT EYE SWITCH
• SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF
• AF RANGE LIMITER
• FOCUS CHECK LOCK
• SPORTS FINDER MODE
• PRE-SHOT sJ
• SELF-TIMER
• AE BKT SETTING
• FOCUS BKT SETTING
• PHOTOMETRY
• SHUTTER TYPE
10
Function Controls
• ZOOM/FOCUS CONTROL RING
• AWB LOCK ONLY
• CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (T)
• LOCK SETTING
• CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (W)
• PERFORMANCE
• F CONSTANT SPEED FOCUS (N)
• AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
• F CONSTANT SPEED FOCUS (F)
• Bluetooth ON/OFF
• AE LOCK ONLY
• QUICK MENU
• AF LOCK ONLY
• PLAYBACK
• AE/AF LOCK
• NONE
• AF-ON
N • To disable the function button, choose NONE.
• Selected function lock is not available when CONSTANT SPEED
ZOOM (T) or CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (W) is assigned to a lens
function button (P 280).
Shortcuts
10
308
Peripherals and Optional
Accessories
309
Lenses
The camera can be used with lenses for the FUJIFILM
X-mount.
Lens Parts
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
A Lens hood
B Mounting marks
C Focus ring
D Zoom ring
E Aperture ring
F O.I.S. switch
G Aperture mode switch
H Lens signal contacts
I Front lens cap
J Rear lens cap
N A XF18-55mmF2.8-4 R LM OIS lens is used here for illustrative purposes.
11
310
Lenses
Lens Care
• Use a blower to remove dust, then gently wipe with a soft, dry
cloth. Any remaining stains can be removed by wiping gently
with a piece of Fujifilm lens-cleaning paper to which a small
amount of lens-cleaning fluid has been applied.
• Replace the front and rear caps when the lens is not in use.
Removing Lens Caps
Remove lens caps as shown.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
O Lens caps may differ from those shown.
11
311
Attaching Lens Hoods
When attached, lens hoods reduce glare
and protect the front lens element.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
312
Lenses
Lenses with Aperture Rings
At settings other than A, you can adjust
aperture by rotating the lens aperture
ring (exposure modes A and M).
A 16 11 8 5.6 4 2.8
A 16 11 8 5.6 4
Aperture ring
N • Selecting ON for MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL disables the
aperture ring.
• When the aperture ring is set to A, rotate the command dials to adjust
aperture.
The Aperture Mode Switch
If the lens has an aperture mode switch, aperture can be adjusted manually by sliding the
switch to Z and rotating the aperture ring.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
Aperture ring
Aperture mode switch
11
313
Lenses with No Aperture Rings
Aperture can be adjusted using the front
command dial in modes A (aperture-priority AE) and M (manual).
N Aperture control can be reassigned to the rear command dial using
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING.
Lenses with O.I.S. Switches
If the lens supports optical image stabilization (O.I.S.), the image stabilization mode can be chosen in the camera
menus. To activate image stabilization,
slide the O.I.S. switch to ON.
O.I.S. switch
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
314
Lenses
Manual Focus Lenses
Slide the focus ring to the front for autofocus.
For manual focus, slide the focus ring to
the back and rotate it while checking the
results in the camera display. The focus
distance and depth-of-field indicators
can be used to assist manual focus.
O Note that manual focus may not be available in all shooting modes.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
The Depth-of-Field Indicator
The depth-of-field indicator shows the approximate depth of field (the distance in front of and
behind the focus point that appears to be in
focus). The indicator is displayed in film format.
11
315
Lenses
Power Zoom Lenses
Zoom can be adjusted on power zoom lenses using the zoom/
focus control ring, zoom button, or zoom ring.
O Adjusting zoom while the lens is wet makes it easier for water to find
its way inside the lens. Wipe any water from the lens before adjusting
zoom.
N A XF18-120mmF4 LM PZ WR lens is used here for illustrative purposes.
Control
A Zoom ring
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
Description
Rotate the zoom ring to zoom in or out manually.
Rotate the zoom/focus control ring to zoom in or out
B Zoom/focus control ring using powered zoom. The zoom speed is proportional
to the speed with which the ring is rotated.
Switch the role of zoom/focus control ring from focus
C Z/F (zoom/focus) button
to zoom or vice versa.
Press a zoom button to zoom in or out at a steady
speed using powered zoom. Zoom ends when the
D Zoom buttons
button is pressed a second time.
N • The
Z/F and zoom buttons can be assigned other roles using
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > POWER ZOOM LENS FUNCTION (Fn)
SETTING.
• The speed at which zoom can be adjusted via the zoom buttons can
be chosen using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > LENS ZOOM/FOCUS
SETTING.
316
External Flash Units
Use optional external flash units for flash photography.
Some units support high-speed sync (FP) and can be used
at shutter speeds faster than the flash sync speed, while
others can function as commanders controlling remote
units via optical wireless flash control.
O You may be unable to test-fire the flash in some circumstances, for example when a setup menu is displayed on the camera.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
Red-Eye Removal
Red-eye removal is available when FLASH is selected for F FLASH
SETTING > RED EYE REMOVAL. Red-eye removal minimizes “red-eye”
caused when light from the flash is reflected from the subject’s retinas.
Flash Sync Speed
The flash will synchronize with the shutter at shutter speeds of ½50 s or
slower.
Optional Flash Units from Fujifilm
The camera can be used with optional Fujifilm shoe-mounted flash units.
Third-Party Flash Units
Do not use third-party flash units that apply over 300 V to the camera hot
shoe.
11
317
Flash Settings
1 Connect the unit to the camera.
2
In shooting mode, select FLASH
FUNCTION SETTING in the F (FLASH
SETTING) menu tab. The options
available vary with the flash unit.
FLASH SETTING
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
RED EYE REMOVAL
TTL-LOCK MODE
LED LIGHT SETTING
COMMANDER SETTING
CH SETTING
EXIT
Menu
EF-X8
SYNC
TERMINAL
SHOE MOUNT
FLASH
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
COMMANDER
(OPTICAL)
3
Description
Displayed when an optional EF-X8 flash unit is mounted
on the hot shoe and raised.
Adjust settings for flash units connected via the sync
terminal. SYNC TERMINAL is displayed if the EF-X8 is
lowered and either no flash unit, or an incompatible flash
unit, is mounted on the hot shoe.
Displayed when an optional flash unit other than the
EF-X8 is mounted on the hot shoe and turned on.
Displayed if an optional flash unit functioning as a commander for Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control is
connected and turned on.
Highlight items using the focus stick
(focus lever) and rotate the rear command dial to change the highlighted
setting.
Press DISP/BACK to put the changes into effect.
11
318
319
321
322
325
MODE
EF-X8
ADJUST
4
P
END
External Flash Units
EF-X8
The following settings are available when an optional EF-X8
shoe-mounted flash unit is attached.
MODE
EF-X8
ADJUST
END
Setting
319
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
Description
Choose from the following options:
• TTL: TTL mode. Adjust flash compensation (B) and choose
a flash mode (C).
• M: The flash fires at the selected output (B) regardless of
subject brightness or camera settings. Output is expressed
in fractions of full power, from ⁄ to ⁄. The desired results
may not be achieved at low values if they exceed the limits
of the flash control system; take a test shot and check the
A Flash control mode results.
• C (COMMANDER): Choose if the flash is being used to control remote synced flash units, for example as part of a studio flash system.
• D (OFF): The EF-X8 does not fire. Flash units connected
via the sync terminal will still fire when the shutter is released, but can be disabled by lowering the EF-X8 and turning the units off in the flash settings menu.
Adjust
flash level. The options available vary with the flash
Flash
compensation/
B
control mode (A).
output
11
Setting
C Flash mode (TTL)
D Sync
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
320
Description
Choose a flash mode for TTL flash control. The options available vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected.
• E (FLASH AUTO): The flash fires only as required; flash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. A p icon
displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway indicates that the flash will fire when the photo is taken.
• F (STANDARD): The flash fires with every shot if possible;
flash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The
flash will not fire if not fully charged when the shutter is
released.
• G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the flash with slow shutter
speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a
backdrop of night scenery. The flash will not fire if not fully
charged when the shutter is released.
Choose whether the flash is timed to fire immediately after
the shutter opens (H/1ST CURTAIN) or immediately before
it closes (I/2ND CURTAIN). 1ST CURTAIN is recommended in
most circumstances.
External Flash Units
SYNC TERMINAL
The following options are available when no compatible flash
unit is connected or if a unit is connected via the sync terminal or
uses only the X-contact on the hot shoe.
MODE
SYNC TERMINAL
ADJUST
END
Setting
The Sync Terminal
Use the sync terminal to connect flash units
that require a sync cable.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
Description
Choose from the following options:
• M: A trigger signal is transmitted via the hot shoe X contacts
when a picture is taken. Choose a shutter speed slower than
A Flash control mode the sync speed; even slower speeds may be required if the
unit uses long flashes or has a slow response time.
• D (OFF): The trigger signal is disabled.
Choose whether the flash is timed to fire immediately after
the shutter opens (H/1ST CURTAIN) or immediately before
B Sync
it closes (I/2ND CURTAIN). 1ST CURTAIN is recommended in
most circumstances.
11
321
SHOE MOUNT FLASH
The following options are available when an optional
shoe-mounted flash unit is attached and turned on.
MODE
SHOE MOUNT FLASH
ADJUST
Setting
END
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
Description
The flash control mode selected with the flash unit. This can
in some cases be adjusted from the camera; the options available vary with the flash.
• TTL: TTL mode. Adjust flash compensation (B).
• M: The flash fires at the selected output regardless of subject
A Flash control mode brightness or camera settings. Output in some cases can be
adjusted from the camera (B).
• MULTI: Repeating flash. Compatible shoe-mounted flash
units will fire multiple times with each shot.
• D (OFF): The flash does not fire. Some flash units can be
turned off from the camera.
11
322
External Flash Units
Setting
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
Description
The options available vary with flash control mode.
• TTL: Adjust flash compensation (the full value may not be
applied if the limits of the flash control system are exceeded). In the cases of the EF-X20, EF-20, and EF-42, the selected value is added to the value selected with the flash unit.
B Flash compensation/ • M/MULTI: Adjust flash output (compatible units only).
output
Choose from values expressed as fractions of full power,
from ⁄ (mode M) or ¼ (MULTI) down to ⁄ in increments
equivalent to ⁄ EV. The desired results may not be achieved
at low values if they exceed the limits of the flash control
system; take a test shot and check the results.
Choose a flash mode for TTL flash control. The options available vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected.
• E (FLASH AUTO): The flash fires only as required; flash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. A p icon
displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway indicates that the flash will fire when the photo is taken.
F (STANDARD): The flash fires with every shot if possible;
•
C Flash mode (TTL) flash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The
flash will not fire if not fully charged when the shutter is
released.
• G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the flash with slow shutter
speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a
backdrop of night scenery. The flash will not fire if not fully
charged when the shutter is released.
11
323
Setting
D Sync
E Zoom
F Lighting
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
G LED light
G Number of flashes *
H Frequency *
Description
Control flash timing.
• H (1ST CURTAIN): The flash fires immediately after the shutter opens (generally the best choice).
• I (2ND CURTAIN): The flash fires immediately before the
shutter closes.
• R (AUTO FP(HSS)): High-speed sync (compatible units only).
The camera automatically engages front-curtain highspeed sync at shutter speeds faster than the flash sync
speed. Equivalent to 1ST CURTAIN when MULTI is selected
for flash control mode.
The angle of illumination (flash coverage) for units that support flash zoom. Some units allow the adjustment to be
made from the camera. If AUTO is selected, zoom will automatically be adjusted to match coverage to lens focal length.
If the unit supports this feature, choose from:
• J (FLASH POWER PRIORITY): Gain range by slightly reducing
coverage.
• K (STANDARD): Match coverage to picture angle.
• L (EVEN COVERAGE PRIORITY): Slightly increase coverage for
more even lighting.
Choose how the built-in LED light functions during still photography (compatible units only): as a catchlight (M/CATCHLIGHT),
as an AF-assist illuminator (N/AF ASSIST), or as both a catchlight and an AF-assist illuminator (O/AF ASSIST+CATCHLIGHT).
Choose OFF to disable the LED during photography.
Choose the number of times the flash fires each time the
shutter is released in MULTI mode.
Choose the frequency at which the flash fires in MULTI mode.
* Full value may not be applied if limits of flash control system are exceeded.
11
324
External Flash Units
COMMANDER(OPTICAL)
The options will be displayed if the unit is currently functioning
as a commander for Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control.
MODE
COMMANDER(OPTICAL)
ADJUST
END
B
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control offers a choice of
four channels (Channels 1 through 4) for the exchange of optical
signals between the commander and remote flash units. Separate channels can be used for different flash systems or to prevent interference when multiple systems are operating in close
proximity.
The flash units can also be placed in up to
three groups (A, B, and C) and flash mode
C
and flash level adjusted separately for
A
each group.
11
325
Setting
A Flash control mode
(group A)
B Flash control mode
(group B)
C Flash control mode
(group C)
D Flash compensation/
output (group A)
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
E Flash compensation/
output (group B)
F Flash compensation/
output (group C)
11
326
Description
Choose flash control modes for groups A, B, and C. TTL%
is available for groups A and B only.
• TTL: The units in the group fire in TTL mode. Flash compensation can be adjusted separately for each group.
• TTL%: If TTL% is selected for either group A or B, you can
specify the output of the selected group as a percentage of the other and adjust overall flash compensation
for both groups.
• M: In mode M, the units in the group fire at the selected
output (expressed as a fraction of full power) regardless
of subject brightness or camera settings.
• MULTI: Choosing MULTI for any group sets all the units
in all groups to repeating flash mode. All units will fire
multiple times with each shot.
• D (OFF): If OFF is selected, the units in the group will
not fire.
Adjust flash level for the selected group according to
option selected for flash control mode. Note that the full
value may not be applied if the limits of the flash control
system are exceeded.
• TTL: Adjust flash compensation.
• M/MULTI: Adjust flash output.
• TTL%: Choose the balance between groups A and B and
adjust overall flash compensation.
External Flash Units
Setting
G Flash mode (TTL)
I Zoom
J Lighting
327
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
H Sync
Description
Choose a flash mode for TTL flash control. The options
available vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected.
• E (FLASH AUTO): The flash fires only as required; flash
level is adjusted according to subject brightness. A
p icon displayed when the shutter button is pressed
halfway indicates that the flash will fire when the photo
is taken.
• F (STANDARD): The flash fires with every shot if possible; flash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The flash will not fire if not fully charged when the
shutter is released.
• G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the flash with slow shutter
speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a
backdrop of night scenery. The flash will not fire if not
fully charged when the shutter is released.
Control flash timing.
• H (1ST CURTAIN): The flash fires immediately after the
shutter opens (generally the best choice).
• I (2ND CURTAIN): The flash fires immediately before the
shutter closes.
• R (AUTO FP(HSS)): High-speed sync (compatible units only).
The camera automatically engages front-curtain highspeed sync at shutter speeds faster than the flash sync
speed. Equivalent to 1ST CURTAIN when MULTI is selected
for flash control mode.
The angle of illumination (flash coverage) for units that support flash zoom. Some units allow the adjustment to be
made from the camera. If AUTO is selected, zoom will automatically be adjusted to match coverage to lens focal length.
If the unit supports this feature, choose from:
• J (FLASH POWER PRIORITY): Gain range by slightly reducing coverage.
• K (STANDARD): Match coverage to picture angle.
• L (EVEN COVERAGE PRIORITY): Slightly increase coverage
for more even lighting.
11
External Flash Units
Setting
K Commander
K Number of flashes
L Channel
L Frequency
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
328
Description
Choose the group for units functioning as a commander for Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control in TTL,
TTL%, or M mode. This option is available only with clipon flash units that support Fujifilm optical wireless remote
flash control.
• Gr A: Assign the commander to group A.
• Gr B: Assign the commander to group B.
• Gr C: Assign the commander to group C.
• OFF: Output from the commander is held to a level that
does not affect the final picture.
Choose the number of times the flash fires each time the
shutter is released in MULTI mode.
Choose the channel used by the commander for communication with the remote flash units. Separate channels
can be used for different flash systems or to prevent interference when multiple systems are operating in close
proximity.
Choose the frequency at which the flash fires in MULTI
mode.
Vertical Battery Grips
The VG-XH vertical battery grip can be used to supplement
the camera battery or when holding the camera rotated to
take pictures in portrait (“tall”) orientation.
M Focus stick (focus lever)
N Rear command dial
O AFON button
P AEL (exposure lock) button
Q Q (quick menu) button
R Indicator lamps
S Performance selector
T Battery tray
U Battery-chamber cover latch
V Connector
W Compartment for connector cover
supplied with camera
N All controls perform the same function as the matching controls on
the camera.
329
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
A Fn1 button
B WB button
C ISO button
D Shutter button
E Control lock
F Front command dial
G Lock screw knob
H Tripod socket
I Eyelet for camera strap
J Connector cover
K Lock screw
L Serial number plate
11
Attaching the Vertical Battery Grip
(A)
(B)
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
N • Check that the camera is off before attaching or removing the vertical
battery grip.
• The camera file transmitter/vertical battery grip connector cover (A)
can be stored in the grip connector cover compartment. Keep the
grip contact cap (B) in a safe place when not in use.
O • Fully tighten the lock screw knob after attaching the grip.
• Do not touch the contacts.
• After removing the grip, replace the file transmitter/vertical battery
grip connector cover (A) and contact cap (B).
• The grip is not waterproof, and caution is required to prevent the en-
try of dirt, dust, water, noxious gases, salt, and other foreign matter.
Do not place the grip on wet surfaces. Before use, be sure that the
battery tray and battery-chamber cover are fully closed.
11
330
Vertical Battery Grips
Inserting and Removing Batteries
Insert the batteries as shown.
The batteries can be removed as shown.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
N • Be sure the camera is off before exchanging batteries.
• Use only NP-W235 batteries.
11
331
Battery Level
When a vertical battery grip is connected, the
camera battery level display shows the camera
battery level and the level of the batteries inserted in the VG-XH.
• The display shows the level of inserted batteries only.
• When a full complement of batteries are inserted in the camera and the
VG-XH, the batteries will be used in the following order:
A The left grip battery (L)
B The right grip battery (R)
C The camera battery
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
332
Vertical Battery Grips
Charging the Batteries
The batteries in the vertical battery grip
will charge when the grip is attached to
a camera that is connected to an AC-5VJ
AC adapter via a USB cable.
The indicator lamps will light green while
the battery charges; the lamp on the left
shows the status of the left battery, the
lamp on the right the status of the right
battery.
Indicator lamp
On
Off
Blinks
Battery status
Battery charging
Charging complete
Battery fault
reduces charging times to as little as 180 minutes.
• The batteries will not charge while the camera is on.
• For more information, see “Charging the Battery” (P 46) and “The
Battery and Power Supply” (P 350).
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
O • All three batteries charge simultaneously; charging takes about
330 minutes.
• Using a device that supplies power with an outputs of 45 W or above
11
333
File Transmitters
Attach an optional FT-XH file transmitter to connect to
wireless LAN or Ethernet networks for file upload or tethered photography. The FT-XH can also be used in combination with a battery inserted in the camera for greater
battery capacity.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
A Fn1 button
B WB button
C ISO button
D Shutter button
E Control lock
F Front command dial
G Lock screw knob
H Tripod socket
I Eyelet for camera strap
J Connector cover
K Lock screw
L Serial number plate
M Focus stick (focus lever)
N Rear command dial
O AFON button
334
P AEL (exposure lock) button
Q Q (quick menu) button
R Indicator lamps
S Performance selector
T Battery tray
U Battery-chamber cover latch
V USB connector cover
W LAN connector cover
X USB connector (Type-C)
Y Hole to screw USB cable
Z LAN connector
a Connector
b Compartment for connector cover
supplied with camera
File Transmitters
N • The controls on the FT-XH perform the same functions as the matching controls on the camera.
• The USB (Type-C) connector is for smartphone tethering only. Use
the camera USB connector when uploading pictures to a computer or smartphone, performing tethered photography via USB, or
charging batteries.
• For information for accessing network/USB features while the file
transmitter is connected, visit:
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/x-h2_connection/
Attaching the File Transmitter
The procedure is the same as for vertical battery grips (P 330).
Inserting and Removing Batteries
The procedure is the same as for vertical battery grips (P 331).
O Access to the network/USB features in only available when a battery
is inserted in the camera and at least one battery is inserted in the
transmitter.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
Charging the Batteries
The procedure is the same as for vertical battery grips (P 333).
11
335
Cooling Fans
Cooling fans help keep the camera cool, allowing longer
periods of non-stop movie recording.
Attaching a Cooling Fan
Open the monitor and attach an FAN-001 cooling fan.
O Turn the camera off before attaching or removing the fan.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
1
Open the monitor.
2
Remove the camera cooling fan connector cover and the
fan connector cap.
After removing the cooling fan connector cover (A), attach
it to the fan for safe-keeping. Keep the fan connector cap (B)
in a safe place.
(B)
(A)
11
(A)
336
Cooling Fans
3
Place the fan on the camera, making sure the screws and
connectors are correctly aligned.
4
Tighten the screws.
ened.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
N The cooling fan may fall off if the screws are not sufficiently tight-
11
337
Using the Fan
Fan speed can be adjusted using the A SHOOTING SETTING >
xF COOLING FAN SETTING and B MOVIE SETTING >
xF COOLING FAN SETTING options in the photo and movie
menus, respectively. Select OFF to turn the fan off.
O At some speeds, the noise of the fan may be audible in movies recorded with the camera.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories
11
338
Technical Notes
339
Accessories from Fujifilm
The following optional accessories are available from Fujifilm.
For the latest information on the accessories available in your
region, check with your local Fujifilm representative or visit
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/.
Rechargeable Li-ion batteries
NP-W235: Additional high-capacity NP-W235 rechargeable batteries can be purchased as required.
Dual battery chargers
BC-W235: The BC-W235 can charge up to two NP-W235 batteries at a time. At
+25 °C/+77 °F, the batteries will charge in about 200 minutes. Using a device that
supplies power with an outputs of 30 W or above reduces charging times to as
little as 150 minutes.
Eye cups
EC-XH W/EC-XT L/EC-XT M/EC-XT S/EC-GFX: Attach viewfinder eyecups to prevent light
leaking into the viewfinder window.
Remote releases
RR-100: Use to reduce camera shake or keep the shutter open during a time exposure (⌀2.5 mm).
Stereo microphones
MIC-ST1: An external microphone for movie recording.
FUJINON lenses
XF-/XC-series lenses: Interchangeable lenses for use exclusively with the FUJIFILM
X-mount.
FUJINON MKX-series lenses: Cinema lenses for the FUJIFILM X-mount.
Technical Notes
Macro extension tubes
MCEX-11/16: Attach between the camera and the lens to shoot at high reproduction ratios.
Teleconverters
XF1.4X TC WR: Increases the focal length of the compatible lenses by about 1.4×.
XF2X TC WR: Increases the focal length of the compatible lenses by about 2.0×.
12
340
Accessories from Fujifilm
Mount adapters
FUJIFILM M MOUNT ADAPTER: Allows the camera to be used with a wide selection
of M-mount lenses.
Body caps
BCP-001: Cover the camera lens mount when no lens is attached.
Vertical battery grips
VG-XH: See “Vertical battery grips” (P 329).
Technical Notes
Shoe-mounted flash units
EF-X500: In addition to manual and TTL flash control, this clip-on flash unit has a
Guide Number of 50/164 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports FP (high-speed sync), allowing it to be used at shutter speeds that exceed the flash sync speed. Featuring
support for the optional EF-BP1 battery pack and Fujifilm optical wireless flash
control, it can be used as a commander or remote flash unit for remote wireless
flash photography.
EF-BP1: A battery pack for EF-X500 flash units. Takes up to 8 AA batteries.
EF-60: In addition to manual and TTL flash control, this clip-on flash unit has a
Guide Number of 60/197 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports FP (high-speed sync), allowing it to be used at shutter speeds that exceed the flash sync speed. It can also
be used as remote flash under the control of an optional EF-W1 wireless commander.
EF-W1: With support for the NAS * wireless communication standard developed
by Nissin Japan, this wireless flash commander can be used with optional EF-60
clip-on flash units and other NAS-compliant units.
* NAS is a registered trademark of Nissin Japan Ltd.
EF-X8: This compact, clip-on flash unit draws power from the camera has a Guide
Number of approximately 8/26 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and can cover the angle of view of
a 16 mm lens (equivalent to 24 mm in 35 mm format).
EF-42: This clip-on flash unit has a Guide Number of 42/137 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and
supports manual and TTL flash control.
EF-X20: This clip-on flash unit has a Guide Number of 20/65 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and
supports manual and TTL flash control.
EF-20: This clip-on flash unit has a Guide Number of 20/65 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and
supports TTL flash control (manual flash control is not supported).
12
341
Accessories from Fujifilm
File transmitters
FT-XH: See “File Transmitters” (P 334).
Cooling fans
FAN-001: See “Cooling Fans” (P 336).
Grip belts
GB-001: Improves grip. Combine with a hand grip for more secure handling.
Cover kits
CVR-XH: A set of covers for the X-H2. Contains a sync terminal cap, a hot-shoe cover, and a memory card slot cover, as well as two file transmitter/vertical battery
grip connector covers.
instax SHARE printers
SP-1/SP-2/SP-3: Connect via wireless LAN to print pictures on instax film.
Technical Notes
12
342
Software for Use with Your Camera
The camera can be used with the following software. For the
latest information on software available from Fujifilm, visit
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/.
Smartphone Apps
Establish a wireless connection between your camera and a
smartphone or tablet.
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX is RAW conversion software from Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co., Ltd. View RAW
pictures on your computer and convert them into other formats.
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX is available free of
charge from the Fujifilm website.
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/software/raw-file-converterex-powered-by-silkypix/
N • “RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX” is supplied by Ichikawa
Soft Laboratory Co., Ltd.
• For information on when support will be available, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/software/raw-file-converter-expowered-by-silkypix/
Technical Notes
12
343
Capture One Express for Fujifilm
View RAW pictures on your computer and convert them into other formats. Capture One Express for Fujifilm is available free of
charge from Capture One A/S.
https://www.captureone.com/products-plans/capture-one-express/fujifilm
N Visit the website above for information on when support will be available.
Capture One for Fujifilm
Capture One for Fujifilm workflow software from Capture One
A/S supports tethered shooting and the conversion of RAW pictures into other formats.
https://www.captureone.com/explore-features/fujifilm
N Visit the website above for information on when support will be available.
FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in (Exclusively for Lightroom)
A plug-in for Adobe Lightroom Classic.
• FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in PRO/FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/adobe-photoshop-lightroomtether-plugin/
Technical Notes
FUJIFILM X Acquire
This computer application lets you connect to the camera via USB
or Wi-Fi and automatically download photos to a specified folder
as they are taken, or backup and restore the camera via USB.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/x-acquire/
12
344
Software for Use with Your Camera
FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO
When the camera is connected to a computer via USB, FUJIFILM
X RAW STUDIO can use the camera’s unique image processing
engine to rapidly convert RAW files to create high-quality images
in other formats.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/x-raw-studio/
FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner
Computer software for combining pictures taken using pixel-shift
multi-shot or reducing false colors (P 125).
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/pixel-shift-combiner/
Technical Notes
12
345
For Your Safety
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Instructions: All the safety and operating instructions
• Read Instructions
should be read before the appliance is operated.
Instructions: The safety and operating instructions
• Retain Instructions
should be retained for future reference.
Warnings: All warnings on the appliance and in the
• Heed Warnings
operating instructions should be adhered to.
Instructions: All operating and use instructions
• Follow Instructions
should be followed.
Technical Notes
12
Installation
Power Sources: This video product should be operated only
from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your
home, consult your appliance dealer or local power company. For video products intended to operate from battery
power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions.
Grounding or Polarization: This video product is equipped
with a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having
one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the
power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are
unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing
the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety
purpose of the polarized plug.
Alternate Warnings: This video product is equipped with
a three-wire grounding-type plug, a plug having a third
(grounding) pin. This plug will only fit into a grounding-type
power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to
insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose
of the grounding type plug.
Overloading: Do not overload wall outlets and extension
cords as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.
Ventilation: Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided
for ventilation, to ensure reliable operation of the video product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings
must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never
be blocked by placing the video product on a bed, sofa, rug,
or other similar surface.
This video product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is
provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. This video product should never be placed near or
over a radiator or heat register.
Attachments: Do not use attachments not recommended by
the video product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
Water and Moisture: Do not use this video product near water—for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink,
or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool,
and the like.
346
Power-Cord Protection: Power-supply cords should be routed
so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by
items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the appliance.
Accessories: Do not place this video product on an unstable
cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The video product may
fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious
damage to the appliance. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold
with the video product. Any mounting of the appliance
should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should
use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.
An appliance and cart combination
should be moved with care. Quick
stops, excessive force, and uneven
surfaces may cause the appliance and
cart combination to overturn.
Antennas
Outdoor Antenna Grounding: If an outside antenna or cable
system is connected to the video product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some
protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.
Section 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA No.
70, provides information with respect to proper grounding of
the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in
wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to
grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding
electrode.
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS
PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
Ground Clamp
Electric Servicee Equipmentt
Antenna Lead
in Wire
AAnntenna
Discharge Unit
D
(NEC
N SECTION
8
810-20)
Ground Clamps
Power Service Grounding Electrode
System (NEC ART 250. PART H)
Grounding
Conductors (NEC
SECTION 810-21)
For Your Safety
Power Lines: An outside antenna system should not be locat- Damage Requiring Service: Unplug this video product from
ed in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personlight or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power nel under the following conditions:
lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, • When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged
extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such • If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the
power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal.
video product.
• If the video product has been exposed to rain or water.
Use
If the video product has been dropped or the cabinet has
Cleaning: Unplug this video product from the wall outlet be- •
been damaged.
fore cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
If the video product does not operate normally follow the
Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are
Object and Liquid Entry: Never push objects of any kind into covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustthis video product through openings as they may touch dan- ment of other controls may result in damage and will often
gerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore
a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the the video product to its normal operation.
video product.
When the video product exhibits a distinct change in perforLightning: For added protection for this video product re- mance — this indicates a need for service.
ceiver during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended
Replacement Parts: When replacement parts are required, be
and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall
sure the service technician has used replacement parts specoutlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will
ified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as
prevent damage to the video product due to lightning and
the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in
power-line surges.
fire, electric shock or other hazards.
Service
Safety Check: Upon completion of any service or repairs to
Servicing: Do not attempt to service this video product this video product, ask the service technician to perform
yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to safety checks to determine that the video product is in propdangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to er operating condition.
qualified service personnel.
Be sure to read these notes before use
Safety Notes
• Make sure that you use your camera correctly. Read these
The symbols on the product (including the accesories) represent the following:
safety notes and your Basic Manual carefully before use.
AC
• After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place.
DC
About the Icons
The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate
the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the information indicated by the icon is ignored and the product is
used incorrectly as a result.
Class II equipment (The construction of the product
is double-insulated.)
WARNING
This icon indicates that death or serious inWARNING jury can result if the information is ignored.
The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the
instructions which are to be observed.
Triangular icons tell you that this information requires attention (“Important”).
Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that the
action indicated is prohibited (“Prohibited”).
Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an
action that must be performed (“Required”).
Unplug
from power
socket
Do not allow water or foreign objects to enter the camera or connecting cables. Do not use the camera or
connecting cables following ingress of fresh or salt
water, milk, beverages, detergents, or other liquids.
Should liquid find its way into the camera or connecting
cables, turn the camera off, remove the battery, disconnect the USB cable, and disconnect and unplug the AC
adapter. Continued use of the camera can cause a
fire or electric shock. Contact your Fujifilm dealer.
347
Technical Notes
This icon indicates that personal injury or
CAUTION material damage can result if the information is ignored.
If a problem arises, turn the camera off, remove the
battery, disconnect the USB cable, and unplug the AC
power adapter. Continued use of the camera when
it is emitting smoke, is emitting any unusual odor,
or is in any other abnormal state can cause a fire or
electric shock. Contact your Fujifilm dealer.
12
WARNING
Do not use in
the bathroom
or shower
Do not
disassemble
Do not touch
internal
parts
Do not use the camera in the bathroom or shower. This
can cause a fire or electric shock.
Never attempt to change or take apart the camera (never open the case). Failure to observe this precaution
can cause fire or electric shock.
Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other
accident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock
or in injury from touching the damaged parts. Remove the battery immediately, taking care to avoid
injury or electric shock, and take the product to the
point of purchase for consultation.
Do not change, heat or unduly twist or pull the connection cord and do not place heavy objects on the connection cord. These actions could damage the cord and
cause a fire or electric shock. If the cord is damaged,
contact your Fujifilm dealer. Do not use cables with
bent connectors.
Do not place the camera on an unstable surface. This
can cause the camera to fall or tip over and cause
injury.
Never attempt to take pictures while in motion. Do
not use the camera while walking or driving. This
can result in you falling down or being involved in
a traffic accident.
Do not touch any metal parts of the camera during a
thunderstorm. This can cause an electric shock due
to induced current from the lightning discharge.
Do not use the battery except as specified. Load the
battery as shown by the indicator.
Technical Notes
Do not disassemble, modify, or heat batteries. Do not
drop, strike, or throw batteries or otherwise subject
them to strong impacts. Do not use batteries that show
signs of leaking, deformation, discoloration, or other
abnormalities. Use only designated chargers to recharge rechargeable batteries and do not attempt to recharge non-rechargeable Li-ion or alkaline batteries. Do
not short batteries or store them with metallic objects.
Failure to observe these precautions could result
in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or
leaking, causing fire, burns, or other injury.
Use only batteries or AC power adapters specified for
use with this camera. Do not use voltages other than the
power supply voltage shown. The use of other power
sources can cause a fire.
12
348
WARNING
If the battery leaks and fluid gets in contact with your
eyes, skin or clothing, flush the affected area with clean
water and seek medical attention or call an emergency
number right away.
Do not use the charger to charge batteries other than
those specified here. The supplied charger is for use
only with batteries of the type supplied with the
camera. Using the charger to charge conventional
batteries or other types of rechargeable batteries
can cause the battery to leak, overheat or burst.
Using a flash too close to a person’s eyes may cause
visual impairment. Take particular care when photographing infants and young children.
Do not remain in prolonged contact with hot surfaces.
Do not leave one part of the body in contact with the
product for prolonged periods while the product is on.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in
low-temperature burns, particularly during prolonged use, at high ambient temperatures, when
HIGH is selected for AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.,
or with users who suffer from poor circulation or
reduced sensation, in which case use of a tripod or
similar precautions are recommended.
Do not use in the presence of flammable objects, explosive gases, or dust.
When carrying the battery, install it in a digital camera
or keep it in the hard case. When storing the battery,
keep it in the hard case. When discarding, cover the
battery terminals with insulation tape. Contact with
other metallic objects or batteries could cause the
battery to ignite or burst.
Keep memory cards, hot shoes, and other small parts
out of the reach of small children. Children may
swallow small parts; keep out of reach of children.
Should a child swallow a small part, seek medical
attention or call emergency.
Keep out of reach of small children. Among the elements that could cause injury are the strap, which
could become entangled about a child’s neck,
causing strangulation, and the flash, which could
cause visual impairment.
Follow the directions of airline and hospital personnel.
This product generates radio-frequency emissions
that could interfere with navigational or medical
equipment.
For Your Safety
CAUTION
Do not use this camera in locations affected by oil
fumes, steam, humidity or dust. This can cause a fire
or electric shock.
Do not leave this camera in places subject to extremely
high temperatures. Do not leave the camera in locations such as a sealed vehicle or in direct sunlight.
This can cause a fire.
Do not place heavy objects on the camera. This can
cause the heavy object to tip over or fall and cause
injury.
Do not move the camera while the AC power adapter is
still connected. Do not pull on the connection cord to
disconnect the AC power adapter. This can damage
the power cord or cables and cause a fire or electric
shock.
Do not cover or wrap the camera or the AC power adapter in a cloth or blanket. This can cause heat to build
up and distort the casing or cause a fire.
Do not use the plug if it is damaged or if it does not fit
securely into the outlet. Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or electric shock.
When you are cleaning the camera or you do not plan to
use the camera for an extended period, remove the battery and disconnect and unplug the AC power adapter.
Failure to do so can cause a fire or electric shock.
When charging ends, unplug the charger from the
power socket. Leaving the charger plugged into the
power socket can cause a fire.
When a memory card is removed, the card could come
out of the slot too quickly. Use your finger to hold it and
gently release the card. Injury could result to those
struck by the ejected card.
Do not handle the memory card immediately after
shooting. The memory card may be hot, resulting
in burns. Wait for the card to cool before removing
it from the camera.
Technical Notes
Request regular internal testing and cleaning for your
camera. Build-up of dust in your camera can cause
a fire or electric shock. Contact your Fujifilm dealer
to request internal cleaning every two years. Please
note that this service is not free of charge.
Dispose of the product in accord with location regulations.
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not
be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or
the like.
12
349
The Battery and Power Supply
Note: Check the type of battery used in your camera and read ■ Cautions: Handling the Battery
the appropriate sections.
• Do not transport or store with metal objects such as neckWARNING: Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat laces or hairpins.
• Do not expose to flame or heat.
such as sunshine, fire or the like.
Do not disassemble or modify.
The following describes the proper use of batteries and how •
Do not expose to low atmospheric pressures.
to prolong their life. Incorrect use can shorten battery life or •
• Use with designated chargers only.
cause leakage, overheating, fire, or explosion.
• Dispose of used batteries promptly.
Li-ion Batteries
• Do not drop or subject to strong physical shocks.
Read this section if your camera uses a rechargeable Li-ion • Do not expose to water.
battery.
• Keep the terminals clean.
The battery is not charged at shipment. Charge the battery • The battery and camera body may become warm to the
touch after extended use. This is normal.
before use. Keep the battery in its case when not in use.
■ Caution: Disposal
■ Notes on the Battery
The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use. Dispose of used batteries in accord with local regulations.
Attention should be drawn to the environmental aspects of
Charge the battery one or two days before use.
battery disposal. Use the apparatus under moderate climate.
Battery life can be extended by turning the camera off when
Do not mechanically crush or split batteries.
not in use.
Technical Notes
12
Battery capacity decreases at low temperatures; a depleted AC Power Adapters
battery may not function when cold. Keep a fully charged • The AC power adapter is for indoor use only.
spare battery in a warm place and exchange as necessary, • Be sure the cable is securely connected to the camera.
or keep the battery in your pocket or other warm place and • Turn the camera off before disconnecting the adapter. Disinsert it in the camera only when shooting. Do not place the connect the adapter by the plug, not the cable.
battery in direct contact with hand warmers or other heating • Do not disassemble.
devices.
• Do not expose to high heat and humidity.
• Do not subject to strong physical shocks.
■ Charging the Battery
The battery can be charged using the camera and supplied • The adapter may hum or become hot to the touch during
AC adapter or an optional BC-W235 dual battery charger. use. This is normal.
Charging times will increase at ambient temperatures below • If the adapter causes radio interference, reorient or relocate
+10 °C (+50 °F) or above +35 °C (+95 °F). Do not attempt to the receiving antenna.
charge the battery at temperatures above +40 °C (+104 °F); at
temperatures below +5 °C (+41 °F), the battery will not charge.
Do not attempt to recharge a fully charged battery. The battery
does not however need to be fully discharged before charging.
The battery may be warm to the touch immediately after
charging or use. This is normal.
■ Battery Life
A noticeable decrease in the length of time the battery will
hold a charge indicates that it has reached the end of its service life and should be replaced.
If the battery is left for long periods without charging, you
may find that its quality degrades or that it no longer holds a
charge. Charge the battery regularly.
■ Storage
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, store
it at room temperature with the battery charged to approximately one half to ⁄ capacity.
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and store it in a dry place with an ambient
temperature of from +15 °C to +25 °C (+59 °F to +77 °F). Do
not store in locations exposed to extremes of temperature.
350
For Your Safety
Using the Camera
Trademark Information
including artificial light sources or natural light sources Digital Split Image is a trademark or registered trademark of
such as the sun in a cloudless sky. Failure to observe this FUJIFILM Corporation. Digital Micro Prism is a trademark or
precaution could damage the camera image sensor.
registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation. The typefaces
• Strong sunlight focused through the viewfinder may dam- included herein are solely developed by DynaComware Taiage the panel of electronic viewfinder (EVF). Do not aim wan Inc. Apple, iPhone, iPad, Mac, Mac OS X, OS X, macOS,
the electronic viewfinder at the sun.
Lightning and Apple ProRes are registered trademarks of
Apple Inc. in the U.S.A. and other countries. Windows is a
Take Test Shots
registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A.
Before taking photographs on important occasions (such as
and other countries. Android is a trademark or registered
at weddings or before taking the camera on a trip), take a
trademark of Google LLC. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Phototest shot and view the results to ensure that the camera is
shop, and Lightroom are trademarks or registered trademarks
functioning normally. FUJIFILM Corporation cannot accept
of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other counliability for damages or lost profits incurred as a result of
tries. Wi-Fi®, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, and Wi-Fi Protected
product malfunction.
Setup® are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance®. The
Notes on Copyright
Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks
Unless intended solely for personal use, images recorded owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks
using your digital camera system cannot be used in ways by Fujifilm is under license. The SDHC and SDXC logos are
that infringe copyright laws without the consent of the own- trademarks of SD-3C, LLC. CFexpress is a trademark of the CFA
er. Note that some restrictions apply to the photographing (CompactFlash Association). The HDMI logo is a trademark or
of stage performances, entertainments, and exhibits, even registered trademark of HDMI Licensing LLC. All other trade
when intended purely for personal use. Users are also asked names mentioned in this manual are the trademarks or registo note that the transfer of memory cards containing images tered trademarks of their respective owners.
or data protected under copyright laws is only permissible
Electrical Interference
within the restrictions imposed by those copyright laws.
This camera may interfere with hospital or aviation equipHandling
ment. Consult with hospital or airline staff before using the
To ensure that images are recorded correctly, do not subject camera in a hospital or on an aircraft.
the camera to impact or physical shocks while images are
Color Television Systems
being recorded.
NTSC (National Television System Committee) is a color teleLiquid Crystal
vision telecasting specification adopted mainly in the U.S.A.,
In the event that the display is damaged, care should be tak- Canada, and Japan. PAL (Phase Alternation by Line) is a color
en to avoid contact with liquid crystal. Take the urgent action television system adopted mainly in European countries and
indicated should any of the following situations arise:
China.
• If liquid crystal comes in contact with your skin, clean the Exif Print (Exif Version 2.32)
area with a cloth and then wash thoroughly with soap and
Exif Print is a newly revised digital camera file format in which
running water.
information stored with photographs is used for optimal col• If liquid crystal enters your eyes, flush the affected eye with or reproduction during printing.
clean water for at least 15 minutes and then seek medical
assistance.
IMPORTANT NOTICE: Read Before Using the Software
• If liquid crystal is swallowed, rinse your mouth thoroughly Direct or indirect export, in whole or in part, of licensed softwith water. Drink large quantities of water and induce vom- ware without the permission of the applicable governing
iting, then seek medical assistance.
bodies is prohibited.
Although the display is manufactured using extremely
Lenses and Other Accessories
high-precision technology, it may contain pixels that are
always lit or that do not light. This is not a malfunction, and • Use a screw 4.5 mm or shorter when attaching a tripod.
• Fujifilm will not be held liable for performance issues or
images recorded with the product are unaffected.
damage caused by the use of third-party accessories.
• Do not aim the camera at extremely bright light sources,
Technical Notes
12
351
NOTICES
To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the unit to rain or moisture.
Please read the “Safety Notes” and make sure you understand them before using the camera.
Perchlorate Material—special handling may apply. See:
http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
For Customers in the U. S. A.
Tested To Comply With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
Technical Notes
Contains IC : 10293A-WMBACBM25
Contains FCC ID : COF-WMBACBM25
FCC Statement: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION: This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different
from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician
for help.
FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
12
352
Radiation Exposure Statement: This device meets the government’s requirements for exposure to radio waves. This
device is designed and manufactured not to exceed the
emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy
set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S.
Government.
The exposure standard for wireless device employs a unit of
measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR.
The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg. Tests for SAR are
conducted using standard operating positions accepted by
the FCC with the device transmitting at its highest certified
power level in all tested frequency bands.
Notes on the Grant: To comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules,
this product must be used with a Fujifilm-specified ferrite-core A/V cable, USB cable, and DC supply cord.
A lithium ion battery that is recyclable powers
the product you have purchased. Please call
1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how to
recycle this battery.
California Code of Regulations, Title 20, Division 2, Chapter 4, Article 4, Appliance Efficiency Regulations, Sections 1601 through
1609
For Your Safety
For Customers in Canada
CAN ICES-003 (B)/NMB-003(B)
CAUTION: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Industry Canada statement: This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter,
except tested built-in radios. The County Code Selection
feature is disabled for products marketed in the US/ Canada.
Radiation Exposure Statement: The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are associated with using low power wireless devices. There is no
proof, however, that these low power wireless devices are
absolutely safe. Low power Wireless devices emit low levels
of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while
being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health
effects (by heating tissue), exposure of low-level RF that does
not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health
effects. Many studies of low-level RF exposures have not
found any biological effects. Some studies have suggested
that some biological effects might occur, but such findings
have not been confirmed by additional research. X-H2 has
been tested and found to comply with IC radiation exposure
limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets
RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules.
Operation in the band 5150–5250 MHz is only for indoor use
to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems.
Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment in Private Households
In the European Union, Norway, Iceland and
Liechtenstein: This symbol on the product, or in
the manual and in the warranty, and/or on its
packaging indicates that this product shall not
be treated as household waste. Instead it should
be taken to an applicable collection point for the recycling of
electrical and electronic equipment.
By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will
help prevent potential negative consequences to the environment and human health, which could otherwise be
caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product.
This symbol on the batteries or accumulators
indicates that those batteries shall not be treated
as household waste.
If your equipment contains easy removable batteries or accumulators please dispose these separately according to your
local requirements.
The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural resources. For more detailed information about recycling this
product, please contact your local city office, your household
waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the
product.
In Countries Outside the European Union, Norway, Iceland and
Liechtenstein: If you wish to discard this product, including
the batteries or accumulators, please contact your local authorities and ask for the correct way of disposal.
In Japan: This symbol on the batteries indicates
that they are to be disposed of separately.
Caring for the Camera
To ensure continued enjoyment of the product, observe the following precautions.
Technical Notes
Storage and Use
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and memory card. Do not store or use the camera
in locations that are:
• exposed to rain, steam, or smoke
• very humid or extremely dusty
• exposed to direct sunlight or very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle on a sunny day
• extremely cold
• subject to strong vibration
• exposed to strong magnetic fields, such as near a broadcasting antenna, power line, radar emitter, motor, transformer,
or magnet
• in contact with volatile chemicals such as pesticides
• next to rubber or vinyl products
12
353
Wireless Network and Bluetooth Devices: Cautions
This product complies with the following EU Directives:
• RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU
• RE Directive 2014/53/EU
Hereby, FUJIFILM Corporation declares that the radio equipment type FF210003 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
https://dl.fujifilm-x.com/global/products/cameras/x-h2/pdf/x-h2_doc-myt.pdf
The full text of the UK declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
https://dl.fujifilm-x.com/en-gb/products/cameras/x-h2/pdf/x-h2_doc-myt_uk.pdf
This compliance is indicated by the following conformity marking placed on the product:
Technical Notes
12
This marking is valid for non-Telecom products and EU harmonized Telecom products (e.g. Bluetooth®).
• Maximum radio-frequency power (EIRP):
WLAN 2.4 GHz: 10.28 dBm
WLAN 5 GHz: 12.29 dBm
Bluetooth: 2.23 dBm
IMPORTANT: Read the following notices before using the camera’s built-in wireless transmitter.
Q This product, which contains encryption function developed in the United States, is controlled by the United States
Export Administration Regulations and may not be exported or re-exported to any country to which the United States
embargoes goods.
device. Fujifilm does not accept liability for damages resulting from unauthorized
• Use only a wireless network or Bluetooth device.
use. Do not use in applications requiring a high degree of reliability, for example in medical devices or other systems that
may directly or indirectly impact human life. When using the device in computer and other systems that demand a greater
degree of reliability than offered by wireless network or Bluetooth devices, be sure to take all necessary precautions to
ensure safety and prevent malfunction.
• Use only in the country in which the device was purchased. This device conforms to regulations governing wireless network
and Bluetooth devices in the country in which it was purchased. Observe all location regulations when using the device.
Fujifilm does not accept liability for problems arising from use in other jurisdictions.
• Do not use the device in locations subject to magnetic fields, static electricity, or radio interference. Do not use the transmitter in
the vicinity of microwave ovens or in other locations subject to magnetic fields, static electricity, or radio interference that
may prevent reception of wireless signals. Mutual interference may occur when the transmitter is used in the vicinity of
other wireless devices operating in the 2.4 GHz band.
• The wireless transmitter operates in the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands using DSSS, OFDM and GFSK modulation.
• Security: Wireless network and Bluetooth devices transmit data via radio and consequently their use requires greater attention to security than applies in the case of wired networks.
- Do not connect to unknown networks or networks to which you do not have access rights, even if they are displayed
on your device, as such access may be considered unauthorized. Connect only to networks to which you have access
rights.
- Be aware that wireless transmissions may be vulnerable to interception by third parties.
- Do not connect this device directly to telecommunications networks (including public wireless LANs) operated by
providers or mobile, landline, Internet, or other telecommunications services.
The
• following may be punishable by law:
- Disassembly or modification or this device
- Removal of device certification labels
• This device operates on the same frequency as commercial, educational, and medical devices and wireless transmitters. It also operates on the same frequency as licensed transmitters and special unlicensed low-voltage transmitters used in RFID tracking
systems for assembly lines and in other similar applications.
• To prevent interference with the above devices, observe the following precautions. Confirm that the RFID transmitter is not in
operation before using this device. Should you observe that the device causes interference in licensed transmitters used
for RFID tracking, immediately stop using the affected frequency or move the device to another location. If you notice that
this device causes interference in low-voltage RFID tracing systems, contact a Fujifilm representative.
354
For Your Safety
• Do not use this device on board an aircraft. When on an aircraft, follow the instructions of airline personnel. Note that this prod-
uct may emit radio-frequency radiation even when off. This can be prevented by selecting ON for AIRPLANE MODE in
the network/USB setting menu before boarding.
• Requirements in AT/BE/BG/CZ/DK/EE/FR/DE/IS/IE/IT/EL/ES/CY/LV/LI/LT/LU/HU/MT/NL/NO/PL/PT/RO/SI/SK/TR/FI/SE/CH/
UK/HR. 5150 MHz–5350 MHz is for indoor use only.
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Information
SAR is measured with the device at 0 mm to the body, while transmitting at the highest certified output power level in
all frequency bands of the device. The maximum SAR value is 0.224 W/kg (head/body) averaged over 10 gram of tissue.
U.K. Importer:
FUJIFILM UK Limited
Fujifilm House, Whitbread Way, Bedford, Bedfordshire, MK42 0ZE, United Kingdom
EU Importer:
FUJIFILM Electronic Imaging Europe GmbH
Fujistrasse 1 47533 Kleve, Germany
Technical Notes
12
355
For Your Safety
Be sure to read these notes before using the lens
Safety Notes
WARNING
• Make sure that you use the lens correctly. Read these safety
notes and the camera Basic Manual carefully before use.
• After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place.
About the Icons
The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate
the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the information indicated by the icon is ignored and the product is
used incorrectly as a result.
This icon indicates that death or serious
WARNING injury can result if the information is ignored.
This icon indicates that personal injury or
CAUTION material damage can result if the information is ignored.
The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the
instructions which are to be observed.
Triangular icons tell you that this information requires attention (“Important”).
Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that the
action indicated is prohibited (“Prohibited”).
Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an
action that must be performed (“Required”).
Do not
immerse
Do not immerse in or expose to water. Failure to observe this precaution can cause a fire or electric
shock.
Do not
disassemble
Do not disassemble (do not open the case). Failure
to observe this precaution can cause fire, electric
shock, or injury due to product malfunction.
Do not touch
internal
parts
Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other
accident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock
or in injury from touching the damaged parts. Remove the battery immediately, taking care to avoid
injury or electric shock, and take the product to the
point of purchase for consultation.
Do not place on unstable surfaces. The product may
fall, causing injury.
Do not view the sun through the lens or camera viewfinders. Failure to observe this precaution can cause
permanent visual impairment.
CAUTION
Do not use or store in locations that are exposed to
steam, or smoke or are very humid or extremely dusty.
Failure to observe this precaution can cause fire or
electric shock.
Do not leave in direct sunlight or in locations subject
to very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle
on a sunny day. Failure to observe this precaution
can cause fire.
Keep out of the reach of small children. This product
could cause injury in the hands of a child.
Do not handle with wet hands. Failure to observe this
precaution can cause electric shock.
Keep the sun out of the frame when shooting backlit
subjects. Sunlight focused into the camera when
the sun is in or close to the frame can cause fire
or burns.
Technical Notes
When the product is not in use, replace the lens caps and
store out of direct sunlight. Sunlight focused by the
lens can cause fire or burns.
Do not carry the camera or lens while they are attached
to a tripod. The product can fall or strike other objects, causing injury.
12
356
Product Care
To ensure continued enjoyment of the product, observe
the following precautions.
Camera body: Use a soft, dry cloth to clean the camera body after
each use. Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals,
which could discolor or deform the leather on the camera body.
Any liquid on the camera should be removed immediately with
a soft, dry cloth. Use a blower to remove dust from the monitor,
taking care to avoid scratches, and then gently wipe with a soft,
dry cloth. Any remaining stains can be removed by wiping gently with a piece of Fujifilm lens-cleaning paper to which a small
amount of lens-cleaning fluid has been applied. To prevent dust
entering the camera, replace the body cap when no lens is in
place.
Image sensor: Multiple photographs marred by spots or blotches in
identical locations may indicate the presence of dust on the image sensor. Clean the sensor using D USER SETTING > SENSOR
CLEANING.
Technical Notes
12
357
Cleaning the Image Sensor
Dust that cannot be removed using D USER SETTING >
SENSOR CLEANING can be removed manually as described below.
O Note that there will be a charge to repair or replace the image sensor if
it is damaged during cleaning.
1
Use a blower (not a brush) to remove
dust from the sensor.
N Do not use a brush or blower brush.
Failure to observe this precaution
could damage the sensor.
2
Check whether the dust has been successfully removed. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 as necessary.
3
Replace the body cap or lens.
Technical Notes
12
358
Firmware Updates
Updates to product firmware may result in changes not
described in the manual. For more information, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/firmware/cameras/
Checking the Firmware Version
O The camera will only display the firmware version if a memory card is
inserted.
1
2
Turn the camera off and check that a memory card is inserted.
3
Turn the camera off.
Turn the camera on while pressing the DISP/BACK button. The
current firmware version will be displayed; check the firmware version.
N To view the firmware version or update firmware for optional accessories such as interchangeable lenses, shoe-mounted flash units, and
mount adapters, mount the accessories on the camera.
Technical Notes
12
359
Troubleshooting
Consult the table below should you encounter problems
using your camera. If you don’t find the solution here, contact your local Fujifilm distributor.
N Troubleshooting information for network/USB features is available at:
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/x-h2_connection/
Power and Battery
Problem
Solution
• The battery was not charged before first use: The battery is not
Technical Notes
12
charged at shipment. Charge the battery before first use
(P 46).
The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful•
The camera does not
ly-charged spare battery (P 46).
turn on.
• The battery is inserted incorrectly: Reinsert in the correct orientation (P 40).
• The battery-chamber cover is not latched: Latch the battery-chamber cover (P 40).
The monitor may not turn on if the camera is turned off
The monitor does not
and then on again very quickly. Keep the shutter button
turn on.
pressed halfway until the monitor activates.
• The battery is cold: Warm the battery by placing it in a pocket or other warm place and reinsert it in the camera immediately before taking a picture.
• There is dirt on the battery terminals: Clean the terminals
The battery runs down with a soft, dry cloth.
quickly.
• ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > PRE-AF: Turn
PRE-AF off (P 154).
• The battery has been charged many times: Select BATTERY
AGE to view the battery age; if the battery is old, replace
it with a new battery (P 250).
The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a
The camera turns off
fully-charged spare battery (P 46).
suddenly.
The camera does not The camera may be busy. Check the indicator lamp
turn off.
(P 11).
360
Troubleshooting
Problem
Solution
• Make sure that the AC power adapter is correctly plugged
in (P 46).
• Ensure that the plug adapter is correctly connected to the
Charging does not start.
Charging does not start
(USB).
Charging does not start
(battery charger).
Charging is slow.
The indicator lamp
blinks, but the battery
does not charge.
the battery has not been charged for an extended period,
charging will be disabled to ensure safety. Replace it with
a new battery.
• Insert the camera battery (P 40).
• Reinsert the camera battery in the correct orientation
(P 40).
• Confirm that the camera is connected to the computer
(P 49).
• If the computer is off or in sleep mode, turn on or wake
the computer and disconnect and reconnect the USB cable (P 49).
• Insert the battery.
• Reinsert the battery in the correct orientation.
• The AC adapter is not correctly connected to the charger: Check
that adapter is correctly connected to the charger.
Charge the battery at room temperature.
• There is dirt on the battery terminals: Clean the terminals
with a soft, dry cloth (P 40).
• The battery has been charged many times: Select BATTERY
AGE to view the battery age; if the battery is old, replace
it with a new battery (P 250). If the battery still fails to
charge, contact your Fujifilm dealer (P 340).
Confirm that POWER SUPPLY ON/COMM OFF is selected for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING.
Technical Notes
The power supply icon is
not displayed.
AC power adapter (P 46).
• The battery has not been recharged for an extended period: If
12
361
Menus and Displays
Problem
Solution
Select ENGLISH for D USER SETTING > Qa
Display is not in English.
(P 54, 249).
Shooting
Problem
Solution
• The memory card is full: Insert a new memory card or delete
pictures (P 42, 225).
• The memory card is not formatted: Format the memory card
in the camera (P 246).
• There is dirt on the memory card contacts: Clean the contacts
Technical Notes
with a soft, dry cloth.
No picture is taken when
The memory card is damaged: Insert a new memory card
•
the shutter button is
(P 42).
pressed.
• The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged spare battery (P 46).
• The camera has turned off automatically: Turn the camera on
(P 50).
• You are using a third-party mount adapter: Select ON for
SHOOT WITHOUT LENS (P 273).
Mottling (“noise”)
Gain is increased to aid composition when the subject is
appears in the monitor
poorly lit and aperture is stopped down, which may result
or viewfinder when
in noticeable mottling when images are previewed in the
the shutter button is
displays. Images taken with the camera are unaffected.
pressed halfway.
• The subject is not suited to autofocus: Use focus lock or manual focus (P 109).
The camera does not
focus.
• The focus area is too small for the intended subject: Increase
the size of the focus area by a couple of steps (P 98).
No panorama is
recorded when the
The indicator lamp was orange when you attempted to record a
shutter button is
panorama: Wait until the indicator lamps turns off (P 11).
pressed.
12
362
Troubleshooting
Problem
Solution
• The subject’s face is obscured by sunglasses, a hat, long hair, or
other objects: Remove the obstructions (P 155).
• The subject’s face occupies only a small area of the frame:
Technical Notes
Change the composition so that the subject’s face occupies a larger area of the frame (P 155).
No face is detected.
• The subject’s face is turned away from the camera: Ask the subject to face the camera (P 155).
• g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING is off: Turn g FACE/EYE
DETECTION SETTING on (P 155).
• The camera is tilted: Keep the camera level.
• The subject’s face is poorly lit: Shoot in better light.
• The subject is partially hidden: Choose a vantage point
where you can see as much of the subject as possible
(P 157).
• The subject occupies only a small portion of the frame: Get
No subject is detected. closer to your subject so it occupies more of the frame
(P 157).
• OFF is selected for SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING: Select
SUBJECT DETECTION ON (P 157).
• The subject is poorly lit: Shoot in better light.
• The flash is disabled: Adjust settings (P 177).
• The electronic shutter is enabled: Choose a SHUTTER TYPE
that does not use the electronic shutter (P 173).
The flash does not fire. • The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged spare battery (P 46).
• The camera is in bracketing or continuous mode: Select single
frame mode (P 9).
• The subject is not in range of the flash: Position the subject in
range of the flash.
The flash does not fully
The flash window is obstructed: Hold the camera correctly.
•
light the subject.
• Shutter speed is faster than the sync speed: Choose a slower
shutter speed (P 74, 78, 375).
12
363
Problem
Pictures are blurred.
Pictures are mottled.
Solution
• The lens is dirty: Clean the lens.
• The lens is blocked: Keep objects
away from the lens
(P 57).
• s is displayed during shooting and the focus frame is displayed in red: Check focus before shooting (P 58).
• Shutter speed is slow and the ambient temperature is* high: This
is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. Use pixel
mapping (P 143).
* X-rays, cosmic rays, and other forms of radiation interacting
with the image sensor may cause bright spots of various colors such as white, red, and blue. Pixel mapping helps reduce
the occurrence of such bright spots.
• The camera has been used continuously at high temperatures:
Turn the camera off and wait for it to cool down (P 50,
370).
• A temperature warning is displayed: Turn the camera off and
wait for it to cool down (P 50, 370).
Technical Notes
12
364
Troubleshooting
Playback
Problem
Pictures are grainy.
Playback zoom is
unavailable.
No sound in movie
playback.
Solution
The pictures were taken with a different make or model of
camera.
The pictures were created using RESIZE or with a different
make or model of camera.
• Playback volume is too low: Adjust playback volume
(P 254).
• The microphone was obstructed: Hold the camera correctly
during recording.
• The speaker is obstructed: Hold the camera correctly during
playback.
Selected pictures are not
deleted.
Some of the pictures selected for deletion are protected.
Pictures remain after Remove protection using the device with which it was
ERASE > ALL FRAMES is originally applied (P 229).
selected.
The battery-chamber cover was opened while the camFile numbering is
era was on. Turn the camera off before opening the batunexpectedly reset.
tery-chamber cover (P 283).
Technical Notes
12
365
Troubleshooting
Connections
Problem
Solution
The camera is connected to a TV: Pictures will be displayed on
The monitor is blank.
the TV instead of in the camera monitor (P 60).
The display mode selected with the VIEW MODE button is
Both the TV and camera EVF ONLY + E: Put your eye to the viewfinder. Use
monitor are blank.
the VIEW MODE button to choose another display mode
(P 18).
• The camera is not properly connected: Connect the camera
properly (P 60).
No picture or sound
• Input on the television is set to “TV”: Set input to “HDMI”
on TV.
(P 60).
• The volume on the TV is too low: Use the controls on the television to adjust the volume (P 60).
Miscellaneous
Problem
Solution
• Temporary camera malfunction: Remove and reinsert the
battery (P 40).
The camera is unresponsive.
• The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged spare battery (P 46).
• The camera is connected to a wireless LAN: End the connection.
• The controls are locked: Press and hold the MENU/OK button
Technical Notes
The camera does not
function as expected.
No sound.
Pressing the Q button
does not display the
quick menu.
12
366
to unlock the controls (P 15, 17).
Remove and reinsert the battery (P 40). If the problem
persists, contact your Fujifilm dealer.
Adjust the volume (P 252).
TTL-LOCK is active: End TTL-LOCK (P 178).
Warning Messages and Displays
The following warnings appear in the display.
Warning
Description
Low battery. Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged
i (red)
spare battery.
Battery exhausted. Charge the battery or insert a fulj (blinks red)
ly-charged spare battery.
The camera cannot focus. Use focus lock to focus on ans (displayed in red with
other subject at the same distance, then recompose the
red focus frame)
picture.
The subject is too bright or too dark and the picture will be
Aperture or shutter
over- or under-exposed. Use the flash for additional lightspeed displayed in red
ing when taking photographs of poorly-lit subject.
FOCUS ERROR
Camera malfunction. Turn the camera off, remove the lens,
LENS CONTROL ERROR and check for foreign matter between the lens and the
TURN OFF THE CAMERA camera body, then replace the lens and turn the camera
AND TURN ON AGAIN on. If the problem persists, contact a Fujifilm dealer.
• The memory card is not formatted or the memory card has been
formatted in a computer or other device: Format the memory
card using D USER SETTING > FORMAT.
CARD NOT INITIALIZED • The memory card contacts require cleaning: Clean the contacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated,
format the card. If the message persists, replace the card.
• Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujifilm dealer.
Turn the camera off, remove the lens, and check for foreign matter between the lens and the camera body, then
LENS ERROR
replace the lens and turn the camera on. If the problem
persists, contact a Fujifilm dealer.
Technical Notes
12
367
Warning
Description
• The memory card is not formatted for use in the camera: Format the card.
• The memory card contacts require cleaning or the memory card
CARD ERROR
PROTECTED CARD
BUSY
b MEMORY FULL
WRITE ERROR
FRAME NO. FULL
Technical Notes
12
368
is damaged: Clean the contacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the
message is repeated, format the card. If the message persists, replace the card.
• Incompatible memory card: Use a compatible card.
• Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujifilm dealer.
The memory card is locked. Unlock the card.
The memory card is incorrectly formatted. Use the camera
to format the card.
The memory card is full and pictures cannot be recorded.
Delete pictures or insert a memory card with more free
space.
• Memory card error or connection error: Reinsert the card or
turn the camera off and then on again. If the message
persists, contact a Fujifilm dealer.
• Not enough memory remaining to record additional pictures:
Delete pictures or insert a memory card with more free
space.
• The memory card is not formatted: Format the memory card.
• The memory card was removed while data were being recorded:
Do not remove the memory card during recording.
• The memory card write speed is slow: When recording movies, be sure the memory card write speed is fast enough.
The camera has run out of frame numbers (current frame
number is 999-9999). Insert a formatted memory card and
select RENEW for D SAVE DATA SET-UP > FRAME NO..
Take a picture to reset frame numbering to 100-0001, then
select CONTINUOUS for FRAME NO..
Warning Messages and Displays
Warning
Description
• The file is corrupt or was not created with the camera: The file
cannot be viewed.
READ ERROR
• The memory card contacts require cleaning: Clean the con-
tacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated,
format the card. If the message persists, replace the card.
• Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujifilm dealer.
An attempt was made to delete or rotate to a protected picPROTECTED FRAME
ture. Remove protection and try again.
The picture is damaged or was not created with the camera.
CAN NOT CROP
Print orders can contain no more than 999 pictures. Copy
any additional pictures you wish to print to another memoDPOF FILE ERROR
ry card and create a second print order.
The picture cannot be printed using DPOF.
CAN NOT SET DPOF
F CAN NOT SET DPOF Movies cannot be printed using DPOF.
The selected picture cannot be rotated.
CAN NOT ROTATE
F CAN NOT ROTATE Movies cannot be rotated.
F CANNOT EXECUTE The selected operation is not supported: Check whether the
m CANNOT EXECUTE picture was recorded with a different model of camera.
Technical Notes
12
369
Warning Messages and Displays
Warning
Description
The camera is approaching the maximum temperature alp (yellow)
CAMERA IS APPROACHING lowed when STANDARD is selected for AUTO POWER
OFF TEMP. and will shortly turn off automatically. Turn the
STANDARD
camera off and wait for it to cool.
TEMPERATURE LIMIT
The camera is approaching the maximum temperature
allowed when HIGH is selected for AUTO POWER OFF
p (yellow)
TEMP. and will shortly turn off automatically. Remaining
CAMERA IS APPROACHING
in contact with the camera could result in low-temperature
HIGH TEMPERburns; mount the camera on a tripod or take other steps to
ATURE LIMIT.DO NOT
avoid prolonged contact with the camera. The camera will
HOLD CAMERA FOR
shortly turn off automatically. Turn the camera off and wait
LONG PERIODS OF TIME
for it to cool. Mottling may increase in pictures taken when
this warning is displayed.
The camera temperature has reached the cutoff point and
p (red)
the camera is about to turn off automatically. Turn the camHIGH TEMPERATURE
era off and wait for it to cool. Mottling may increase in picLIMIT REACHED
tures taken when this warning is displayed.
SHUTTING DOWN
Technical Notes
12
370
Memory Card Capacity
The following table shows the recording time or number
of pictures available at different image sizes. All figures are
approximate; file size varies with the scene recorded, producing wide variations in the number of files that can be
stored. The number of exposures or length remaining may
not diminish at an even rate.
Capacity
T
FINE
O 3∶2
RAW (UNCOMPRESSED)
Photos
RAW (LOSSLESS COMPRESSED)
RAW (COMPRESSED)
Movies *
SD/CFexpress memory cards
64 GB
V2160
W1080
NORMAL
2660
3980
730
1380
1950
79 minutes
79 minutes
* Assumes default bit rate.
O • The types of memory cards suitable for movie recording vary with the
settings selected (P 68).
• Shots over an hour in length may be recorded across multiple files without
interruption. In addition, movies over 4 GB in size will be recorded uninterrupted across multiple files to SD memory cards with capacities 32 GB
or less.
Technical Notes
12
371
Specifications
System
Model
Product Number
Effective pixels
Image sensor
Storage media
Memory card slots
File system
Technical Notes
12
372
FUJIFILM X-H2
FF210003
Approx. 40.2 million
23.5 mm × 15.7 mm (APS-C), X-Trans CMOS 5 HR sensor with
primary color filter
Fujifilm-recommended SD/SDHC/SDXC and CFexpress Type B
memory cards
• SD memory card slot (UHS-II compliant) ×1
• CFexpress memory card slot (Type B) ×1
• Still pictures: Compliant with DCF 2.0
• Compressed: Exif 2.32 JPEG-baseline compliant; DPOF compliant; HEIF compliant (4 : 2 : 2, 10-bit)
• Uncompressed or compressed using a reversible or non-reversible
algorithm: RAW (original RAF format; special-purpose software
required); RAW+JPEG available; TIFF (RGB)
• Movies: Compliant with HEVC/H.265, H.264, and ProRes
• Audio (including voice memos):
- LPCM (two channels: 24-bit, 48 kHz sampling)
- AAC (MP4 recordings only)
• Audio (via XLR microphone adapter):
- LPCM (two channels: 24-bit, 48 kHz sampling; four channels: 24-bit, 48 kHz sampling)
- AAC (MP4 recordings only; two channels: 16-bit, 48 kHz
sampling)
Specifications
System
Image size
O 3∶2 (7728 × 5152)
O 4∶3 (6864 × 5152)
O 16∶9 (7728 × 4344)
O 5∶4 (6432 × 5152)
O 1∶1 (5152 × 5152)
P 3∶2 (5472 × 3648)
P 4∶3 (4864 × 3648)
P 16∶9 (5472 × 3080)
P 5∶4 (4560 × 3648)
P 1∶1 (3648 × 3648)
Q 3∶2 (3888 × 2592)
Q 4∶3 (3456 × 2592)
Q 16∶9 (3888 × 2184)
Q 5∶4 (3264 × 2592)
Q 1∶1 (2592 × 2592)
RAW (7872 × 5196)
TIFF (7728 × 5152)
O panorama: vertical (2160 × 9600)/horizontal (9600 × 1440)
P panorama: vertical (2160 × 6400)/horizontal (6400 × 1440)
Lens mount
FUJIFILM X mount
Sensitivity
• Still pictures: Standard output sensitivity equivalent to
ISO 125–12800 in increments of ⁄ EV; AUTO 1–3; extended
output sensitivity equivalent to ISO 64, 80, 100, 25600, or 51200
• Movies: Standard output sensitivity equivalent to ISO 125–12800
in increments of ⁄ EV; AUTO; extended output sensitivity equivalent to ISO 25600
Metering
256-segment through-the-lens (TTL) metering;
MULTI, SPOT, AVERAGE, CENTER WEIGHTED
Exposure control
Programmed AE (with program shift); shutter-priority AE;
aperture-priority AE; manual exposure
Exposure compensation • Still pictures: −5 EV – +5 EV in increments of ⁄ EV
• Movies: −2 EV–+2 EV in increments of ⁄ EV
Technical Notes
12
373
System
Shutter speed
• MECHANICAL SHUTTER, E-FRONT CURTAIN SHUTTER, E-FRONT +
MECHANICAL
⁃ Mode P: 4 s to ⁄ s
⁃ Mode A: 30 s to ⁄ s
⁃ Modes S and M: 15 min. to ⁄ s
⁃ Bulb: Max. 60 min.
• ELECTRONIC SHUTTER
⁃ Mode P: 4 s to ⁄ s
⁃ Mode A: 30 s to ⁄ s
⁃ Modes S and M: 15 min. to ⁄ s
⁃ Bulb: Fixed at 1 s
• MECHANICAL + ELECTRONIC, E-FRONT + MECHANICAL + ELECTRONIC
⁃ Mode P: 4 s to ⁄ s
⁃ Mode A: 30 s to ⁄ s
⁃ Modes S and M: 15 min. to ⁄ s
⁃ Bulb: Max. 60 min.
Continuous
CONTINUOUS MODE
20fps(1.29X CROP) 1
13fps(1.29X CROP) 1
10fps(1.29X CROP) 1
15fps 2
10fps 3
7.0fps 4
5.0fps
3.0fps
Available frame advance rates
(JPEG)
20
13
10
15
10
7.0
5.0
3.0
Technical Notes
1 Available with electronic shutter only.
2 13 fps with electronic shutter.
3 8.9 fps with electronic shutter.
4 6.7 fps with electronic shutter.
O The frame rate and number of frames per burst var-
ies with shooting conditions and type of memory
card used.
12
374
Specifications
System
Focus
• Mode: Single or continuous AF; manual focus with focus ring
• Autofocus system: Intelligent hybrid AF (TTL contrast-detect/
phase-detection AF)
• Focus-area selection: SINGLE POINT, ZONE, WIDE/TRACKING, ALL
White balance
Auto (WHITE PRIORITY, AUTO, AMBIENCE PRIORITY), Custom 1,
Custom 2, Custom 3, color temperature selection, direct sunlight, shade, daylight fluorescent, warm white fluorescent,
cool white fluorescent, incandescent, underwater
Self-timer
Off, 2 sec., 10 sec.
Flash mode
• MODE: TTL MODE (FLASH AUTO, STANDARD, SLOW SYNC.),
MANUAL, MULTI, OFF
• SYNC. MODE: 1ST CURTAIN, 2ND CURTAIN, AUTO FP (highspeed sync)
• RED EYE REMOVAL: L FLASH, OFF
Hot shoe
Provided (supports TTL flash control); supports sync speeds
as fast as ½ s
Sync contact
X contact; supports sync speeds as fast as ½ s
Sync terminal
Provided
Electronic viewfinder 0.5-in., 5760k-dot OLED viewfinder; magnification 0.80× with
50 mm lens (35 mm format equivalent) at infinity and diopter
(EVF)
set to −1.0 m−1; diagonal angle of view approximately 40°
(horizontal angle of view approximately 32°)
• Diopter adjustment: −5 to +3 m−1
• Eyepoint: Approximately 24 mm
LCD monitor
• Rear monitor: 3.0-in/7.6 cm, 1620k-dot color touch screen
LCD monitor, Vari-angle LCD monitor
• Shoulder monitor: 1.28-in/3.25 cm, 128 × 128-dot memory
LCD monitor
Technical Notes
12
375
System
Movies
(with stereo sound)
• Movie size: V 16:9, J 16:9, T 16∶9, W 17∶9, V 16∶9,
d 17∶9, W 16∶9, W 17∶9
• Frame rate: 59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P, 24P, 23.98P
• Recording/output format:
- H.265 (10-bit MOV 4 : 2 : 2/4 : 2 : 0; 720, 360, 200, 100, or 50
Mbps)
- H.264 (8-bit MOV/MP4 4 : 2 : 0; 360, 200, 100, or 50Mbps)
- ProRes 422 HQ, ProRes 422, ProRes 422 LT (10-bit MOV
4 : 2 : 2)
- HDMI output supported (RAW output supported with
Atomos and Blackmagic Design external recorders; 8-bit
4 : 2 : 2/10-bit 4 : 2 : 2)
High-speed movies • Movie size: W 16∶9, W 17∶9
• Frame advance rate: 240P, 200P, 120P, 100P
Input/output terminals
Microphone connector ⌀3.5 mm mini-stereo jack
Headphone jack socket ⌀3.5 mm mini-stereo jack
Remote release connector ⌀2.5 mm 3-pole mini jack
Digital input/output USB connector (Type-C) USB3.2 Gen2x1
HDMI output
HDMI connector (Type A)
Technical Notes
12
376
Specifications
Power supply/other
Power supply
NP-W235 rechargeable battery (supplied with camera)
Battery life
• Battery type: NP-W235
• Lens: XF35mmF1.4 R
• External flash units: Disabled
• Shooting mode: Mode P
Number of shots
PERFORMANCE
LCD
EVF
Approx. 530
Approx. 400
BOOST 1
NORMAL
Approx. 540
Approx. 510
ECONOMY
Approx. 680
Approx. 570
Number of shots (VG-XH vertical battery grip)
PERFORMANCE
LCD
EVF
Approx. 1420
Approx. 1080
BOOST 1
NORMAL
Approx. 1430
Approx. 1350
ECONOMY
Approx. 1760
Approx. 1490
Total length of footage that can be recorded on
a single charge
Continuance
battery life of
Actual battery life
movie capture
Mode
of movie capture
V2
Approx. 70 minutes
Approx. 100 minutes
Approx. 75 minutes
Approx. 105 minutes
J2
Approx. 75 minutes
Approx. 120 minutes
V3
Approx. 85 minutes
Approx. 140 minutes
W3
High-speed movies 4 Approx. 90 minutes
–
CIPA standard. Measured using battery supplied with camera
and SD memory card.
Note: Battery endurance varies with battery charge level and
the figures given above are not guaranteed. Battery endurance will decline at low temperatures.
377
Technical Notes
1 EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY (120P) selected EVF/LCD
BOOST SETTING.
2 At a frame rate of 29.97 fps.
3 At a frame rate of 59.94 fps.
4 At a frame rate of 120 fps.
12
Power supply/other
Camera size
136.3 mm × 92.9 mm × 84.6 mm (42.8 mm excluding projections,
(W × H × D)
measured at thinnest part)/5.37 in. × 3.66 in. × 3.33 in. (1.69 in.)
Camera weight
Approx. 579 g/20.5 oz., excluding battery, accessories, and
memory card
Shooting weight
Approx. 660 g/23.3 oz., including battery and memory card
Operating conditions • Temperature: −10 °C to +40 °C/+14 °F to +104 °F (+5 °C to
+40 °C/+41 °F to +104 °F when battery is charging)
• Humidity: 10% to 80% (no condensation)
Technical Notes
Wireless transmitter
Wireless LAN
Standards
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac (standard wireless protocol)
Operating frequency • Israel, Indonesia
: 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels)
(center frequency)
• USA, Canada, Brazil, China, India, Korea, Malaysia
: 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels)
: 5,180 MHz–5,320 MHz (W52, W53)
: 5,745 MHz–5,825 MHz (UNII-3)
• European Union, Japan, United Kingdom, Australia, Norway, New
zealand, Turkey, Hong Kong, Philippines, Vietnam, Singapore,
Thailand, UAE, Russia, Taiwan, Saudi Arabia, Qatar, Bahrain,
Oman, Egypt, Iran, Kuwait, Lebanon, Uzbekistan
: 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels)
: 5,180 MHz–5,320 MHz (W52, W53)
: 5,500 MHz–5,700 MHz (W56)
Access protocols
Infrastructure
Bluetooth®
Standards
Bluetooth version 4.2 (Bluetooth Low Energy)
Operating frequency 2,402 MHz–2,480 MHz
(center frequency)
12
378
Specifications
NP-W235 rechargeable battery
Nominal voltage
7.2 V
Nominal capacity
2350 mAh
Rating capacity
2200 mAh
Operating
0 °C to +40 °C/+32 °F to +104 °F
temperature
38.92 mm × 22.8 mm × 52.26 mm/
Dimensions
1.5 in. × 0.9 in. × 2.1 in.
(W × H × D)
Weight
Approx. 79 g/2.8 oz.
AC-5VJ AC power adapter
Manufacturer
Address
Model name
Rated input
Input capacity
Rated output
Average active efficiency
Efficiency at load 10%
No-load power consumption
Operating temperature
Weight
Dongguan Yingiu Power Co.,Ltd.
No.6 Yongxing Road, Shayao Village, Shijie Town,
523292 Dongguan City, Guangdong Province,
PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
AC-5VJ
100 V – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Max. 50 VA
DC5.0V 3.0A 15.0W
84.8 %
84.2 %
0.02 W
0 °C to +40 °C/+32 °F to +104 °F
Approx. 45 g ± 2 g/1.6 oz. ± 0.1 oz.
O Specifications and performance are subject to change without notice.
Fujifilm will not be held liable for any errors this manual may contain.
The appearance of the product may differ from that described in this
manual.
Technical Notes
12
379
7-3, AKASAKA 9-CHOME, MINATO-KU, TOKYO 107-0052, JAPAN
https://fujifilm-x.com

advertisement

Related manuals

advertisement